GENNECT One User’s Manual

GENNECT One
User’s Manual

Rev. 16

Author HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION

Created at 2018 / 10 / 30

Updated at 2023 / 12/ 14

1 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Table of Contents
GENNECT One User’s Manual ................................................................................................................................ 1
Table of Contents ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
Before start using ...................................................................................................................................................... 6
Main screens ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
Install the application ........................................................................................................................................... 11
Connect the instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 13
Import data from files ............................................................................................................................................. 18
Import data from GENNECT Cross for Android/iOS .......................................................................................... 18
Import data from CSV files (Battery Tester/POWER ANALYZER) ................................................................... 20
Import image data ................................................................................................................................................. 20
Import PDF data .................................................................................................................................................... 22
Loading LR5000 Series Measurement Files ........................................................................................................ 23
Loading measurement files from a logger or Memory HiCorder ........................................................................ 24
Loading Power Analyzer (PW8001) BIN files ...................................................................................................... 26
Loading measurement files from a Power Logger or Power Quality Analyzer ................................................. 26
Import data from the measurement instruments ................................................................................................. 28
Import data from Battery Tester (BT3554/BT3554-01/BT3554-50) ................................................................... 28
Import data from PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER ............................................................................... 31
Import measurement data from other compatible instruments. ........................................................................ 33
View data ................................................................................................................................................................. 33
View General Measurement data ......................................................................................................................... 33
View Logging data ................................................................................................................................................. 37
View Battery data .................................................................................................................................................. 41
View PQ3100, PQ3198 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER data ............................................................................ 46
View PW3360, PW3365 POWER LOGGER Data ................................................................................................ 48
View PW3390, PW6001, PW8001 POWER ANALYZER CSV Data (PW Assistant) ......................................... 50
View LR8400, LR8401, LR8402, LR8410, LR8450 DATA LOGGER Waveform ................................................ 54
View MR6000,MR8847A MEMORY HiCORDER Waveform .............................................................................. 55
View Image ............................................................................................................................................................. 57
View PDF Report ................................................................................................................................................... 58
Viewing Measurement Data with the Time-series Viewer ................................................................................... 59
Supported Data Formats ....................................................................................................................................... 59
Limitations ............................................................................................................................................................. 59
Workflow ................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Selecting Measurement Data ................................................................................................................................ 60
Selecting Measurement Parameters and Opening Them with the Time-series Viewer ................................... 61
Using the Time-series/Logging Viewer ................................................................................................................ 63
Displaying Power Analysis Mode (PW8001 only) ................................................................................................ 88
Organize data ........................................................................................................................................................ 100
Add the data group .............................................................................................................................................. 100
Rename the data group ....................................................................................................................................... 101
Move data to the data group ............................................................................................................................... 102
Delete the data group .......................................................................................................................................... 103
Manipulate data list .............................................................................................................................................. 104
Check/Uncheck data ............................................................................................................................................ 104
Collapse/Expand data list ................................................................................................................................... 105
Refine data by the criteria settings .................................................................................................................... 106
Search data by text .............................................................................................................................................. 107
Search data by search tag ................................................................................................................................... 108
Edit title/comment ............................................................................................................................................... 109
Set search tag ....................................................................................................................................................... 110
Edit search tag ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
Output data ........................................................................................................................................................... 112
Output data in HOKI GENNECT Format（.hok） .............................................................................................. 112
Output data in ZIP Format ................................................................................................................................. 113
Output data in CSV/Image format ..................................................................................................................... 114

2 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Output PDF file ................................................................................................................................................... 117

Delete data ............................................................................................................................................................. 119
Changing instrument settings (instrument configuration modification function) ........................................... 120
Supported instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 120
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 120
Workflow .............................................................................................................................................................. 120
Change the instrument's settings ...................................................................................................................... 121
Settings for Battery Tester BT3554/BT3554-01/BT3554-50 ............................................................................. 124
Measure values with the logging feature (Logging Function [LAN]) ................................................................ 141
Supported instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 141
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 142
Overview of the measurement ............................................................................................................................ 144
Start logging......................................................................................................................................................... 144
Stop logging .......................................................................................................................................................... 153
Display logging tasks .......................................................................................................................................... 153
Screen layout........................................................................................................................................................ 156
Manipulate the waveform ................................................................................................................................... 158
Using the logging schedule ................................................................................................................................... 160
Workflow .............................................................................................................................................................. 160
Logging table ........................................................................................................................................................ 160
Logging Schedule ................................................................................................................................................. 164
Display scheduled tasks ...................................................................................................................................... 172
Monitor Measured Values (Dashboard Function [LAN]) .................................................................................... 175
Overview .............................................................................................................................................................. 175
Supported Instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 176
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 177
Workflow .............................................................................................................................................................. 178
Launch the Dashboard ........................................................................................................................................ 179
Launch the Map Editor (instrument selection) ................................................................................................. 179
Create an Instrument Layout (Basic Instructions) ........................................................................................... 188
Created an Instrument Layout (Advanced Instructions) ................................................................................. 189
Start or Stop the Measured Value Monitor ........................................................................................................ 213
Manage Instrument Lists ................................................................................................................................... 218
Other Functionality ............................................................................................................................................. 224
Alarm Function .................................................................................................................................................... 230
Configuring detailed settings for inter-channel calculations ............................................................................. 234
Setting a calculation formula .............................................................................................................................. 234
Configuring detailed settings for automatic output (daily/weekly/monthly reports) ....................................... 239
Configuring detailed settings for automatic output (CSV) ................................................................................. 250
Manually Outputting Reports (Daily, Weekly, and Monthly Reports) ............................................................... 252
Manually Acquiring Files from an Instrument (File Acquisition [MANUAL]) ................................................. 254
Supported Instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 254
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 254
Workflow .............................................................................................................................................................. 255
Start manual file acquisition .............................................................................................................................. 255
List of storage media supported by the manual file acquisition function ........................................................ 258
List of target files................................................................................................................................................. 258
Automatically receive instrument files (File Transfer [AUTO]) ........................................................................ 259
Supported instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 259
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 260
Using the function ............................................................................................................................................... 261
Instrument save settings .................................................................................................................................... 269
List of error codes ................................................................................................................................................ 271
Control an instrument (Remote control [LAN]) .................................................................................................. 275
Supported instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 275
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 275
Using the function ............................................................................................................................................... 276
Synchronize Instrument Clocks [LAN] ................................................................................................................ 278
Supported instruments .......................................................................................................................................... 278

3 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Instructions (synchronizing the time from the [Console] tab) .......................................................................... 279
Instructions (configuring automatic time synchronization) ............................................................................. 280
Synchronizing Instrument Clocks: Details ........................................................................................................ 282
Application settings ............................................................................................................................................... 284
Configure the common settings .......................................................................................................................... 284
Configure the settings for battery tester ........................................................................................................... 288
Linking GENNECT One to GENNECT Cloud .................................................................................................... 291
About Internet Connection ................................................................................................................................... 291
Preparing to Use GENNECT Cloud ..................................................................................................................... 292
Logging In to GENNECT Cloud ........................................................................................................................... 293
Saving/deleting login information ...................................................................................................................... 295
Obtaining a New Password ................................................................................................................................. 296
Sharing and Managing Data with GENNECT Cloud ......................................................................................... 298
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 298
Window layout (overall) ...................................................................................................................................... 299
Window layout and functionality (①Folder selection area) .............................................................................. 300
Window layout and functionality (②Data list) .................................................................................................. 301
Window layout and functionality (③List controls area) ................................................................................... 302
Display layout and functionality (④Information display area) ....................................................................... 303
Display layout and functionality (⑤Function button area） ............................................................................. 304
Creating links between GENNECT One and GENNECT Cloud measurement data ..................................... 305
Managing measurement data in the data list (cloud) ....................................................................................... 307
Configuring Application Settings Related to GENNECT Cloud ........................................................................ 315
[Remote monitoring mode] tab ........................................................................................................................... 315
[Data list (cloud)] tab ........................................................................................................................................... 315
[Data list (local)] tab ............................................................................................................................................ 316
[Logging data] tab................................................................................................................................................ 317
Using Remote Monitoring Mode ........................................................................................................................... 318
Overview .............................................................................................................................................................. 318
Workflow .............................................................................................................................................................. 319
Starting remote monitoring mode ...................................................................................................................... 319
Exiting remote monitoring mode ........................................................................................................................ 325
Window layout ..................................................................................................................................................... 326
Controlling an Instrument (Remote Control [Cloud]) ......................................................................................... 327
Supported instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 327
Starting remote control ....................................................................................................................................... 328
Restarting the instrument .................................................................................................................................. 328
Open in browser ................................................................................................................................................... 328
Update the firmware of the instrument ............................................................................................................... 330
Supported Instruments ....................................................................................................................................... 330
Limitations ........................................................................................................................................................... 330
Workflow .............................................................................................................................................................. 330
Reviewing and Editing User Information and Account Information ................................................................. 333
Deleting the trial user ......................................................................................................................................... 333
Upgrading the Trial plan to the Free plan ......................................................................................................... 334
Share and manage battery tester threshold and profile information in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud
Standard / Pro plans) ............................................................................................................................................ 335
Share battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans) ................................ 335
Manage battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans) ............................. 337
Share battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans) ............... 340
Manage battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans) ........... 341
Logging Out ........................................................................................................................................................... 344
Show Version ......................................................................................................................................................... 345
Check for Updates ................................................................................................................................................. 346
Show Help .............................................................................................................................................................. 347
Show Inquiry form................................................................................................................................................. 348
Show Privacy Policy .............................................................................................................................................. 349
Change the language settings .............................................................................................................................. 349

4 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Uninstall the application ...................................................................................................................................... 350

Uninstall from [All Programs] ............................................................................................................................ 350
Uninstall from [Control Panel] ........................................................................................................................... 351
Appendix ................................................................................................................................................................ 353
Check or configure the network settings of the computer ................................................................................ 353
Identification name and measurement item name in Logging and Dashboard function ............................... 355

5 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Before start using

Thank you for using the HIOKI GENNECT One.

Main screens
The main window of GENNECT One is composed of [Data] ,[Functions],[Console],[Launcher] tabs.

[Data] Tab

① Menu Bar
The menu of the application is displayed.

See the following sections for the functions of the menu.

 IMPORT DATA FROM FILES
 IMPORT DATA FROM THE MEASUREMENT INSTRUMENTS
 CHANGING INSTRUMENT settings (instrument configuration modification function)
 APPLICATION SETTINGS
 SHOW VERSION
 CHECK FOR UPDATES
 SHOW HELP
 SHOW INQUIRY FORM
 SHOW PRIVACY POLICY
 CHANGE THE LANGUAGE SETTINGS

② Data Switch Window

Changes the data type to display in the data list by selecting [Data]/[Report].
Manage the data group in the tree style structure.
Data displayed in the data list is filtered by selecting the group.

See the following sections for the management of the data group.
 ORGANIZE DATA

6 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

③ Toolbar
Search data by text or search tag.
Refine the data displayed in the data list by applying the criteria settings.
Change the checked state or the expanded/collapsed state of the data list.

See the following sections for the functions of the tool bar.
 M ANIPULATE DATA LIST

④ Data List
Display the data loaded from the measurement instrument or GENNECT One in the list. Data is listed
in date order.

See the following sections for the functions of the data list.
 M ANIPULATE DATA LIST

⑤ Button Panel
Open the selected data.
Output the selected data in the CSV/Image/PDF format.
Delete the selected data.

See the following sections for the functions of the button panel.
 V IEW data
 OUTPUT DATA
 DELETE DATA

If you are logged in to GENNECT Cloud, the [Upload] button will be displayed.

You can upload saved measurement data to GENNECT One. Uploaded measurement data will be reflected on the

GENNECT Cloud drive window and in the GENNECT One data list (cloud), creating a data link with GENNECT

Cloud. Measurement data for which a data link has been created can be shared with other users in the same account.

For more information, see the following:

 Creating links between GENNECT One and GENNECT Cloud measurement data

⑥ Information Windows
Show the detailed information of the selected data.
Show the preview image if the data is the image format.

⑦ Login button
Log in to GENNECT Cloud.
 Linking GENNECT One to GENNECT Cloud

7 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

[Functions] Tab

The features for collecting the measured values from the instruments connected to the computer with LAN
cables are listed here.

① Logging
[Logging] feature logs the measured values with the specified logging interval.

This feature supports following instruments.

 LR8400, LR8401, LR8402, LR8410, LR8450, LR8450-01
 MR6000
 PQ3100, PQ3198
 PW3335, PW3336, PW3337
 PW3360, PW3365
 PW3390, PW6001, PW8001
 BT5525, ST5680, IM3523A, RM3545A

See the following sections for the functions of the logging.

 Measured values with the logging feature (Logging Function [LAN])

② Dashboard
The [Dashboard] function allows you to monitor the status of measurements in an easy-to-understand,
visual manner by placing measured values on a user-specified background image.

This feature supports following instruments.

 LR8400, LR8401, LR8402, LR8410, LR8450, LR8450-01
 MR6000
 PQ3100, PQ3198
 PW3335, PW3336, PW3337
 PW3360, PW3365
 PW3390, PW6001, PW8001
 BT5525, ST5680, IM3523A, RM3545A

See the following sections for the functions of the dashboard.

 Monitor MEASURED VALUES (DASHBOARD FUNCTION [LAN])

③ Remote monitoring mode

Linked to GENNECT Cloud, remote monitoring (monitoring, file transfer, remote control, etc.) is
performed.

8 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

This feature supports following instruments.

 LR8410, LR8450, LR8450-01
 MR6000
 PQ3100, PQ3198
 PW3335, PW3336, PW3337
 PW3360, PW3365
 PW3390, PW6001, PW8001
 BT5525, ST5680, IM3523A

See the following sections for the functions of the remote monitoring mode.
 Using Remote Monitoring Mode

「Console」Tab

Configure the measuring instruments connected to the computer via LAN.

See the following sections for the detailed description of [Console] tab.

・ Manually Acquiring Files from an Instrument (File Acquisition [MANUAL])

・ Automatically receive instrument files (File Transfer [AUTO])
・ Control an instrument (Remote control [LAN])

9 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

「Launcher」Tab

Open the HIOKI application software installed on your computer.

① Impulse Winding Tester Sample Application.

Open the application software for ST4030 Impulse Winding Tester installed on your computer.

* If the application software listed in [Other App] tab has not installed on your computer, the following
message appears. Install the application software if needed.

10 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Install the application

Install GENNECT One by following steps.

1. Double click the [setup.exe].

2. Click [Next] button.

3. Click [Next] button, after selecting the destination for installation.

4. Click [Next] button, after selecting the program group.

5. Click [Next] button, after selecting whether to create shortcut icon.

11 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

6. Click [Install] button.

7. Installation is completed after a little while.

8. Click [Next] button to finish the installation.

12 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Connect the instruments

To communicate with Battery Tester（BT3554,BT3554-01,BT3554-50）by USB cable

To communicate with Battery Tester by USB connection cable, the USB driver package must be installed on
the computer.

Install the USB driver package

※See the instruction manual for how to install the USB driver of the earlier product 3554.
※Please note that the earlier product 3554 is NOT supported by Windows 8 or later.

1. Insert the CD-R that comes with BT3554 Series into the computer.

2. Open the [driver] folder.

3. Double-click the [DPInst32.exe] or [DPInst64.exe] to perform the driver installation.(*1)

(*1) For the 32bit version of Windows, click [DPInst32.exe] to perform installation.
For the 64bit version of Windows, click [DPInst64.exe] to perform installation.

4. The installation wizard window is displayed. Click [Next].

5. After a while, the installation will be completed.

13 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

6. Click [Finish] to close the installation wizard.

Connect Battery Tester with the computer.

1. Connect the Battery Tester with the computer using the USB connection cable that comes with BT3554
Series.

2. The conformation message is displayed when the computer find the installed driver.

This message is displayed when the first connection is made between the computer and Battery Tester.

3. If [PC] is displayed in the battery tester, your instrument is connected to the computer.

※ See Import data from Battery Tester (BT3554/BT3554-01/BT3554-50) for how to load data from Battery
Tester.
 See Settings for Battery Tester BT3554/BT3554-01/BT3554-50 for how to perform the settings of Battery
Tester.

14 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Uninstall the USB driver package

※See the instruction manual for how to uninstall the USB driver of the earlier product 3554.

1. Connect the Battery Tester with the computer using the USB connection cable.

2. Click [Start] button.

3. Click [Control Panel].

4. Click [Hardware and Sound].

5. Click [Device Manager].

6. Select [Battery Tester BT3554], after expanding [COM and LPT] tree. Click [Uninstall] in the right-
click menu.

15 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

7. Click [OK], after checking [Delete the driver software for the device].

8. The USB driver package has been deleted.

16 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

To communicate with instruments by LAN cable

(PQ3100, PQ3198, PW3335, PW3336, PW3337, PW3360,PW3365, PW3390, PW6001, PW8001
MR6000, LR8400 series, LR8410, LR8450）、BT5525,ST5680,IM3523A,RM3545A

Before starting the real-time measurement function, you need to connect your computer and the
measurement instruments with LAN cable, then configure the network settings properly. This section
describes how to connect PQ3100 products in a local network and in an existing network.

※ To configure the network settings of measurement instruments, see the instruction manual of each
product.
※ To check or configure the network settings of the computer, see the following section.
 APPENDIX. CHECK OR CONFIGURE THE NETWORK SETTINGS OF THE COMPUTER

Connect your computer and the instruments in a local network

If you configure the instruments in a local network,

using private IP addresses is recommended. Please
make sure that each address does not overlap.

e.g. To configure the IP addresses in the network of 192.168.1.0/24

IP Addresses Computer 192.168.1.1
Instrument #1 192.168.1.2
Instrument #2 192.168.1.3
Instrument #3 192.168.1.4
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateways Computer . . .
Instruments 0.0.0.0

Connect your computer and the instruments in an existing network

If you configure the instruments in an existing network,

you need to consult with your system administrator and
get all the IP addresses for the target instruments. Please
make sure that the IP addresses are assigned within the
network of your computer belonging and each IP address
does not overlap.
Note the assigned network settings in the following list.

IP Addresses
Instrument #1 . . .
Instrument #2 . . .
Instrument #3 . . .
Subnet Mask . . .
Default Gateway . . .

17 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Import data from files

Import data from GENNECT Cross for Android/iOS

1. In GENNECT Cross for Android/iOS, select the data to send in the list of [Data] and then tap [Send]
button.

2. Select the way to send data. Select “Email” for an example.

* You can also send data using any cloud services installed on the device. See the manuals of the service for detail.

*You can also send data by saving data to the storage of the device, then extract the data from the device to the
computer. See the manuals of the device for detail.

18 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. In GENNECT One, import data that has been sent by e-mail.

4. Select [Import]-[Files] in the menu.

5. Click [Open] button, after selecting the data that has been sent.

6. The data that has been imported are saved in the data list of [Data] and the [Not Categorized] group.

19 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Import data from CSV files (Battery Tester/POWER ANALYZER)

Following types of CSV files are supported.

 CSV files for BATTERY TESTER BT3554 measurement data
 CSV files for BATTERY HiTESTER 3554 measurement data
 CSV files for POWER ANALYZER PW3390/PW6001/PW8001 measurement data, waveform data

1. Select [Import]-[Files/Folders]-[File] in the menu.

2. [Select files to import] window is displayed. Change the filter for file extension to [Battery/PowerAnalyzer
CSV Files].

3. Click [Open] button, after selecting the data to import.

4. The data that has been imported are saved in the data list of [Data] and the [Not Categorized] group.

Import image data

1. Select [Import]-[Files] in the menu.

20 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. [Select files to import] window is displayed. Change the filter for file extension to [Image Files].

3. Click [Open] button, after selecting the data to import.

21 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. The data that has been imported are saved in the data list of [Data] and the [Not Categorized] group.

Import PDF data

1. Select [Import]-[Files] in the menu.

2. [Select files to import] window is displayed. Change the filter for file extension to [PDF Files].

22 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Click [Open] button, after selecting the data to import.

4. The data that has been imported are saved in the data list of [Report] and the [Not Categorized] group.

Loading LR5000 Series Measurement Files

The application can load measurement files (.hpr2) acquired from Data Mini LR5000 series instruments
using the LR5000 Utility (*1).
(*1) The LR5000 Utility is a desktop application that comes with Data Mini LR5000 series products.
Data format Extension Supported instruments Remarks
LR5000 series measurement .hrp2 LR5000 series LR5001, LR5011, LR5021 (*2)
data LR5031 (*3)
LR5041, LR5042, LR5043
LR5061
(*2) Data Mini LR5000 series measurement files must be saved on the computer before they can be loaded by the application.
(*3) For more information about how to save Data Mini LR5000 series measurement files on a computer, see the LR5000 series help.

1. Select [File] on the [Import] menu.

2. Change the filter on the file selection screen to [LR5000 series files (*.hrp2)].

23 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Select the file you wish to open and click [Open].

4. Once the import is complete, the data will be saved in the [Unclassified] group under [Data].

Loading measurement files from a logger or Memory HiCorder

GENNECT One can be used to load measurement files from a logger (LR8400, LR8401, LR8402, LR8410,
LR8416, or LR8450) or Memory HiCorder (MR6000,MR8847A).

Data format Type (extension) Supported instruments

Logger binary waveform File (.MEM) LR8400, LR8401, LR8402
LR8410, LR8416
LR8450, LR8450-01
Memory HiCorder binary MR6000,MR8847A

24 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

waveform

1. Select [Files/Folders]–[File] from the [Import] menu.

2. Change the filter on the [Select Files to Import] dialog box to [LOGGER/RECORDER waveform files
(.MEM)].

3. Select the file you wish to open and click [Open].

4. Once the import is complete, the data will be saved in the [Unclassified] group under [Data].

Tip
You can also load a measurement folder by dragging and dropping measurement data files onto the data list.

25 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Loading Power Analyzer (PW8001) BIN files

GENNECT One can be used to load BIN files of Power Analyzer (PW8001).

1. Select [Files/Folders]–[File] from the [Import] menu.

2. Change the filter on the [Select Files to Import] dialog box to [PowerAnalyzer BIN Files (.bin)].

3. Select the file you wish to open and click [Open].

4. Once the import is complete, the data will be saved in the [Unclassified] group under [Data].

Loading measurement files from a Power Logger or Power Quality Analyzer

GENNECT One can be used to load measurement files from a Power Logger (PW3360 or PW3365) or Power
Quality Analyzer (PW43100 or PQ3198).

Data format Type Supported instruments

Power logger data folder Folder PW3360
PW3365

26 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Power Quality Analyzer data PQ3100

folder PQ3198

1. Select [Files/Folders]-[Folder (PW3360, PW3365, PQ3100, PQ3198)] from the [Import] menu.

2. Select the measurement data folder on the [Select Folder] dialog box and click the [Select Folder] button.

3. Once the import is complete, the data will be saved in the [Unclassified] group under [Data].

Tip
You can also load a measurement data folder by dragging and dropping it onto the data list.

27 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Import data from the measurement instruments

Import data from Battery Tester (BT3554/BT3554-01/BT3554-50)

1. Connect the Battery Tester with the computer.

※ To communicate with the Battery Tester by USB connection cable, the USB driver package must be installed on the
computer.

※ See INSTALL THE USB DRIVER PACKAGE for how to install the USB driver of BT3554 series.
※ See the instruction manual for how to install the USB driver of the earlier product 3554.

※ Please note that the earlier product 3554 is NOT supported by Windows 8 or later.

2. Open GENNECT One.

3. Select [Console] tab.

4. Choose the [USB] interface and then click [Update] button.

28 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. To start the instrument setting, choose the connected instrument from the list and then click
button.

6. [Import from Battery Tester] window is displayed. Click [Import] button, after choosing the memory unit
to import and selecting [Database] for the destination.

* If the [CSV File] is selected for the destination, the data in not save in GENNECT One. The data is saved as a CSV

file.

7. The data that has been imported from Battery Tester are saved in the data list of [Data] and the [Not
Categorized] group.

29 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

30 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Import data from PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER

1. To communicate with the PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER, do LAN settings of [Interface
Settings] on the instrument.

*In this example, set IP address to “172.19.114.230”, subnet mask to “255.255.255.0” and default gateway to

“172.19.114.1”.

*See the instruction manual of PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER for how to do LAN settings.

2. Connect the PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER with the computer by the LAN cable.

3. Open GENNECT One.

4. Select [Import]-[Instruments]-[LAN] in the menu.

5. The [Console] tab is displayed. If measuring instruments is not displayed, input the IP address set in step
1. to the [IP Address] box and select "PQ3100" from the drop-down list.

31 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

6. Once a connection has been established, the instrument icon is displayed.

7. Click the [File Acquisition (MANUAL)] button ( ).

8. Select a folder to import, and then click [Import] button.

* Please not that you cannot select the folder that does not include measurement files.

9. [Browse For Folder] window is displayed. Select the directory for saving data and then click [OK] button.

*If you want to continue importing data, repeat step 8 and step 9.

32 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*If you want to finish importing data, click [Close] button in the [PQ3100 Import] window.

10. The data that has been imported from PQ3100 is saved in the data list of [Data] and the [Not
Categorized] group.

Import measurement data from other compatible instruments.

See below for more information about the procedure for importing measurement data from other compatible
measurement instrument.
 Manually Acquiring Files from an Instrument (File Acquisition [MANUAL])

View data
View General Measurement data

Open data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [General Measurement] data by checking data on the data
list.

2. Click [Open] button.

33 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*The [General Measurement] window can display two data types: [General Measurement] or Images.

*If more than one data types are selected, [Select Viewer] window is displayed. Double-click on [General

Measurement],

or select [General Measurement] and click [Open] button to show [Battery] window.

3. [General Measurement] window is displayed.

Add data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [General Measurement] data by checking data on the data
list.

2. Drag and drop the checked data to [General Measurement] window.

3. Data is added to the data management list in [General Measurement] window.

34 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Create General Measurement Data Report

1. Select one data in the data management list of [General Measurement] window.

*Select [General Measurement] data to create report. All the images loaded in the [General Measurement] window

are available in [Create Report] window.

2. Select [Report]-[Create Report] in the menu.

3. [Create Report] window is displayed. Set the cover format of the report in [Cover Format].

*To include images loaded in [General Measurement] window on report, add images from [list of images] to [Images to

add the report].

35 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. Select [View] tab. After a little while, the preview of the report is displayed.

5. Click [Export] button and choose the export format. After selecting the export destination, the report is
exported.

36 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View Logging data

Open data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [Logging] data by checking data on the data list.

2. Click [Open] button and select [Logging].

*The [Logging] window can display two data types: [Logging] or Images.

*If more than one data types are selected, [Select Viewer] window is displayed. Double-click on [Logging], or select

[Logging] and click [Open] button to show [Logging] window.

3. [Logging] window is displayed.

Up to 32 measurement channels can be displayed on the graph.

37 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

* The logging data acquired with version 3.20 or earlier of GENNECT One, the following logging viewer
will open.

Create Logging Data Report

1. Select [Report]-[Create Report] in the menu.

2. [Create Report] window is displayed. Set the cover format of the report in [Cover Format].

38 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Select [View] tab. After a little while, the preview of the report is displayed.

4. Click [Export] button and choose the export format. After selecting the export destination, the 39eport is
exported.

*You can choose from three formats: Excel, PDF, and Word.

Output measurement data to CSV file

This section describes how to output measurement data in the CSV format.

39 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description
Output settings Channel Specifies the measurement parameters (channels) to output as a CSV file.
Displayed channels: Of the measurement parameters (channels) loaded in
the Time-series Viewer, output the measurement parameters (channels)
that are being displayed on the waveform display screen.
All channels: Output all measurement parameters (channels) loaded in the
Time-series Viewer.
Output range Specifies the time range to output as a CSV file.
All data: Output the entire time range.
Between A and B cursors: Output the time range defined by the A and B
cursors.
Time axis format Indicates whether the time format being output to the CSV file is absolute
or relative.
*This setting can be changed using the [Display Numerical Axis] button on
the waveform toolbar.
*This setting cannot be changed on this screen.
Data completion Specifies whether to complete measured values for times for which there is
no measurement data before outputting data with measurement
parameters (channels) with different interval times in the data being
output.
No: Do not complete measured values for times without measurement
data.
Complete using last measured data: Complete measured values using the
last measured value for times without measurement data.
Data thinning Specifies whether to thin intermediate data points when outputting the
data to a CSV file.
1: No data thinning
2: Outputting 1 point for every 2 points
3: Outputting 1 point for every 3 points
…
Number of Specifies the number of decimal places applied to measured values.
decimal places
Comment Specifies a comment to include in the CSV comment header.
[Output CSV] button Outputs the data to a CSV file.
[Cancel] button Cancels the CSV output operation.
[Close] button Closes the dialog box.

40 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View Battery data

Open data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [Battery] data by checking data on the data list.

2. Click [Open] button.

*The [Battery] window can display two data types: [Battery] or Images.

*If more than one data types are selected, [Select Viewer] window is displayed. Double-click on [Battery], or select

[Battery] and click [Open] button to show [Battery] window.

3. [Battery] window is displayed.

41 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Add data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [Battery] data by checking data on the data list.

2. Drag and drop the checked data to [Battery] window.

3. Data is added to the data management list in [Battery] window.

Check the trend of the measured data

1. Select [Add Trend] in the right-click menu of the graph in [Graph] tab.

*You can also select [Add Trend] in the right-click menu of the measured data list in [List] tab.

42 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. Select [Trend] tab. The measured values of the selected data number are displayed in time series for all
the battery data that are read into [Battery] window.

*In the example above, you can understand that the resistance value of the data number 4 increases gradually as

time process.

*To check the trend of the measured data, you need to load more than two [Battery] measurement results that are

measured in different times.

*To check the trend of the battery cell, the measurement results loaded need to be of the identical battery block.

Create Battery Data Report

1. Select one data in the data management list of [Battery] window.

*Select [Battery] data to create report. All the images loaded in the [Battery] window are also available in [Create

Report] window.

2. Select [Report]-[Create Report] in the menu.

3. [Create Report] window is displayed. Set the cover format of the report in [Cover Format].
4. Set the type of list and graph to output in [Data], [Graph] and [Trend Graph].

43 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. To include images loaded in [Battery] window on report, add images from [list of images] to [Images to
add the report].

6. Select the data on the [Data Selection] tab.

44 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

7. Select [View] tab. After a little while, the preview of the report is displayed.

8. Click [Export] button and choose the export format. After selecting the export destination, the report is
exported.

*You can choose from three formats: Excel, PDF, and Word.

45 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View PQ3100, PQ3198 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER data

*To open the measurement data of PQ3100, PQ3198 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER, the application
software [PQ ONE] needs to be installed.
*See the instruction manual of the PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER for how to install "PQ ONE".

Open data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [PQA Measurement Data] by checking data on the data list.

2. Click [Open] button.

*If more than one data types are selected, [Select Viewer] window is displayed. Double-click on [PQA Measurement

Data], or select [PQA Measurement Data] and click [Open] button to show the data.

3. The splash window of "PQ ONE" is displayed.

46 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. [Specify the data] window is displayed. Select a measurement data folder to show and then click [OK]
button.

5. The measurement data is displayed in "PQ ONE".

47 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View PW3360, PW3365 POWER LOGGER Data

- To open the measurement data of PW3360, PW3365 POWER LOGGER, the application software [Power
Logger Viewer (SF1001)] needs to be installed.
- The Power Logger Viewer SF1001 version supported by GENNECT One is V4.50.0 or later. If you are
using V4.00.0 or earlier, please upgrade to the latest version.
- Refer to the power logger viewer SF1001 manual for installation instructions.

Open data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [POWER LOGGER Measurement data] by clicking data on
the data list.

2. Click [Open] button.

※ If more than one data tapes are selected, [Select Viewer] windows is displayed. Double click on [POWER LOGGER
Measurement Data] or select [POWER LOGGER Measurement Data] and click [Open] button to show the data.

3. The splash window of [SF1001 Power Logger Viewer] is displayed.

48 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. [File Information] window is displayed after loading selected data. Click [OK] button.

5. The measurement data is displayed in "SF1001 Power Logger Viewer".

49 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

View PW3390, PW6001, PW8001 POWER ANALYZER CSV Data (PW Assistant)
・PW Assistant allows you to create graphs using Microsoft Excel from the CSV data saved by the power
analyzers PW3390, PW6001, and PW8001. In order to view graphs using Microsoft Excel, you need to have
Microsoft Excel installed on your computer.
・In order to view the power analyzer CSV data in "PW Assistant", the version of GENNECT One needs to
be V4.30 or later.

Notes
・Microsoft Excel is a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
・CSV data saved or edited by other than Power Analyzer cannot be read by PW Assistant.
・The maximum size of CSV data that can be opened by PW Assistant is 500MB. It is not possible to open
data larger than that. Also, when opening large files in Microsoft Excel, it will take some time to process the
data.

Open Measurement Data

Select the CSV data of the measurement data measured by the power analyzer (PW3390, PW6001, and
PW8001) and make the necessary settings for graph display, and the graph of the measurement data will be
displayed in Microsoft Excel.

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [Power Analyzer measurement data] by checking data on
the data list, and click [Open] button.

2. The setting screen is displayed in [PW Assistant].

Set the graph display contents.

50 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

① Set the type of the graph.

The maximum number of graphs that can be displayed is 16 for both [Line graph] and [Bar graph].
You cannot select more than 16 items.

② Set the X axis.

Checking [Arrange the time axis at equal] will display a graph with a constant time interval for the X-
axis setting when the measurement data saved by the power analyzer is manually saved data.
Applies when the selected graph is a line graph only.

③ Set the Output range.

The set section is the graph display range and CSV output range.
Both the start time and stop time cannot be set outside the displayed data section.

④ [Create a graph] button

After setting ① to ③, click this button to launch Microsoft Excel and create a new Excel book.
A new Excel book will be created and the graph will be displayed.
In the [Data] sheet, copy the data from the imported CSV file.
In the [Graph] sheet, create and display a graph based on the settings in the Graph Settings column.

Notes
・The graph display function creates and displays a graph in Microsoft Excel. You need to have
Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to use this function.
・Some items in the output data, such as Status data, will not be copied.

⑤ [Add a CSV File] button

After setting ① to ③, click this button to output the measurement items selected in the graph type
and the data range set in the graph display section to a CSV file.

51 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Notes
・Some items in the output data, such as Status data, will not be copied.

⑥ [Open CSV File] button

Copy the CSV data selected in the PW Assistant to the specified location and open it in the CSV viewer.

Open Waveform Data

Select the CSV data of the waveform data, FFT data, and noise data measured by the power analyzer
(PW3390, PW6001, and PW8001), and select the items required for graph display to display the graph of
the measurement data in Microsoft Excel.

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [Power Analyzer waveform data] by checking data on the
data list, and click [Open] button.

2. The setting screen is displayed in [PW Assistant].

Set the graph display contents.

52 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

① Set the type of the graph.

The maximum number of graphs that can be displayed is 16 for both [line graphs] and [bar graphs].
You cannot select more than 16 items.

② [Create a graph] button

After setting ①, click this button to launch Microsoft Excel and create a new Excel book.
A new Excel book will be created and the graph will be displayed.
In the [Data] sheet, copy the data from the imported CSV file.
In the [Graph] sheet, create and display a graph based on the settings in the Graph Settings column.

Notes
・The graph display function creates and displays a graph in Microsoft Excel. You need to have
Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to use this function.

③ [Add a CSV File] button

After setting ①, click this button to output the measurement items selected in the graph type and the
data range set in the graph display section to a CSV file.

④ [Open CSV File] button

Copy the CSV data selected in the PW Assistant to the specified location and open it in the CSV viewer.

53 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View LR8400, LR8401, LR8402, LR8410, LR8450 DATA LOGGER Waveform

- To open the waveform data of LR8400, LR8401, LR8402, LR8410, LR8450 DATA LOGGER, the
application software [Logger Utility SF1000] needs to be installed.
- Refer to the Logger Utility manual for installation instructions.

Open data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [Data LOGGER Waveform] by clicking data on the data list.

2. Click [Open] button.

※ If more than one data tapes are selected, [Select Viewer] windows is displayed. Double click on [DATA LOGGER
Waveform] or select [DATA LOGGER Waveform] and click [Open] button to show the data.

3. The waveform data is displayed in [Logger Utility SF1000].

54 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View MR6000,MR8847A MEMORY HiCORDER Waveform

- To open the waveform data of MR6000 ,MR8847A MEMORY HiCORDER, the application software [Wave
Viewer (Wv)] or [Wave processor (9335)] or [MR6000Viewer] needs to be installed.
- Refer to the MR6000 MEMORY HiCORDER manual for installing [Wave Viewer (Wv)].
- Refer to the "Wave Processor 9335" manual for installing [Wave Processor (9335)].
- Refer to the “MR6000Viewer”manual for installing [MR6000Viewer].

Open data

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select [MEMORY HiCORDER Waveform] by clicking data on the
data list.

2. Click [Open] button.

※ If more than one data tapes are selected, [Select Viewer] window is displayed. Double click on [MEMORY
HiCORDER Waveform] or select [MEMORY HiCORDER Waveform] and click [Open] button to show the data.

3. The waveform data is displayed in [Wave Viewer (Wv)] or [Wave Processor (9335)] or [MR6000Viewer].

55 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

56 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View Image

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select Image data by checking data on the data list.

2. Click [Open] button.

*If more than one data types are selected, [Select Viewer] window is displayed. Double-click on [Image], or select

[Image] and click [Open] button to show [Logging] window.

3. The default image viewer program on the computer is launched. The selected data is displayed in the
viewer.

57 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

View PDF Report

1. Select [Report] and a data group, then select Image data by checking data on the data list.

2. Click [Open] button.

3. The default PDF viewer program on the computer is launched. The selected data is displayed in the
viewer.

58 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Viewing Measurement Data with the Time-series Viewer

•By importing measurement data to the Time-series Viewer format, it is possible to render measurement
data from different instruments as part of a single time series for viewing and analysis.

Supported Data Formats

The Time-series Viewer supports the following data formats:
Data format Supported Firmware version Remarks
instruments
Data logger waveforms (binary) LR8400 series ― (*1)
LR8410
Data logger waveforms (binary) (*3) LR8450,LR8450-01 Ver. 1.50 or later (*1), (*3)
Power logger measurement data (measurement data folders) PW3360 ― (*1)
PW3365
Power Analyzer measurement data (binary) PW8001 Ver. 1.00 or later (*1)
LR5000 series measurement data (HRP2 format) LR5000 series ― (*2)
(*1) Measurement data must be added to the GENNECT One Data List before it can be opened using the Time-series Viewer. For more
information about how to add measurement data to the GENNECT One Data List, see the following:
 “Manually Acquiring Files from an Instrument (File Acquisition [MANUAL])”
 “Automatically receive instrument files (File Transfer [AUTO])”
(*2) LR5000 measurement data must be added to the GENNECT One Data List before it can be opened using the Time-series Viewer.
For more information about how to add LR5000 measurement data to the GENNECT One Data List, see the following:
 “Loading LR5000 Series Measurement Files”
(*3) Binary format waveform files measured with CAN unit of the LR8450/-01 can only be viewed in the Time-series Viewer.

Limitations
Time-series Viewer Limitations
Item Limitation Remarks

Measurement parameters Up to 512

(loadable)

Measurement parameters Up to 32

(graph display)

Number of graph display Up to 8

views

Number of graph display Up to 2

divisions

Workflow

Selecting Measurement Data (p.60)

Selecting Measurement Parameters and Opening Them with the Time-series Viewer (p.61)

Using the Time-series Viewer (p.63)

59 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Selecting Measurement Data

1. Select the [Data] tab on the main screen.

2. Select data in one of the formats supported by the Time-series Viewer from the Data List.

Note
*For more information about the data formats supported by the Time-series Viewer, see the following:
 “Supported Data Formats”
*Measurement data must be added from the Instrument to GENNECT One data list before it can be
opened using the Time-series Viewer. For more information about how to add measurement data to the
GENNECT One Data List, see the following:
 “Manually Acquiring Files from an Instrument (File Acquisition [MANUAL])”
 “Automatically receive instrument files (File Transfer [AUTO])”
LR5000 measurement data must be added to the GENNECT One Data List before it can be opened
using the Time-series Viewer. For more information about how to add LR5000 measurement data to the
GENNECT One Data List, see the following:
 “Loading LR5000 Series Measurement Files”

3. Click the [Open] button.

Note
*If the data is supported by viewers other than the Time-series Viewer, the [Select Viewer] screen will
appear. Either double-click [Time-series Viewer] or select [Time-series Viewer] and click the [Open]
button.

*To cancel conversion to the Time-series Viewer format, click the [Cancel] button.

4. The [Import Measurement Files] screen will be displayed.

60 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Selecting Measurement Parameters and Opening Them with the Time-series Viewer
1. Expand the tree on the left side of the [Import Measurement Files] screen.
2. Select the measurement parameters you wish to convert to the Time-series Viewer format (up to 512).

3. Click the [Import] button.

The selected measurement parameter(s) will be converted to the Time-series Viewer format.
Once the import operation is complete, the following message will be displayed: “Import operation
completed.”

Note
*If you selected [No] under [Preview time-series data after import], the Time-series Viewer will open
after the import operation completes.
*If you selected [Yes] under [Preview time-series data after import], the process will proceed to the next
step.

4. The [Measurement Parameter Preview] screen will be displayed.

61 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. Expand the tree on the left side to display a list of imported measurement parameters.
(If a comment is stored for each channel in the data logger, the comment will appear in parentheses
after the channel display name.）

Note
*Click a measurement parameter to display a preview of the waveform that has been converted to the
Time-series Viewer format at the bottom right of the screen.
*Deselect the checkbox to the left of any measurement parameter you do not wish to load into the Time-
series Viewer.

6. Click the [OK] button to open the selected measurement parameters in the Time-series Viewer.

Note
*Click the [Cancel] button to cancel the measurement parameter preview and return to the [Import
Measurement Files] screen.

62 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Using the Time-series/Logging Viewer

Interface element names

No. Name Description Details

□1 Menu bar The menu bar provides access to the menus used by the
application.
p.63

□2 Waveform tool buttons These buttons provide access to tools for displaying and
manipulating waveforms.
p.64

□3 Waveform display screen This part of the window displays waveforms.

It allows you to zoom in and out, scroll, and otherwise interact
p.71

with waveforms.
□4 Channel Information panel The channel information panel allows you to select measurement
parameters (channels) and display and edit measured values and
p.74

settings.
□5 Data analysis panel The data analysis panel allows you to analyze measurement data
with functionality including the measurement Data List, Event
p.79

List, waveform search, statistical analysis, and AB Cursor Value

List.
□6 Status bar The status bar displays cursor information. p.87

□1 Menu Bar
The application provides the following menu commands:
Item Description
File Save Saves the current state of the Time-series Viewer.
Exit Exits the Time-series Viewer.
Display Waveforms Highlighting Toggles waveform highlighting on and off.
On: Highlight the waveform with focus.
Off: Do not highlight the waveform with focus.
Number of Views Changes the number of views on the waveform display
screen.
Window Toggles display of the following windows:
•Channel information
•Data analysis
•Status bar

63 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Cursors Toggles display of the following cursors:

•A and B cursors
•Horizontal A and B cursors
Events Toggles display of the following events:
•User events
•Search events
Information Version Information Displays version information for the application.

□2 Waveform Tool Buttons

These buttons provide access to tools for displaying and manipulating waveforms.

Name Description Details

Number of Waveform Changes the number of views on the waveform display screen.
Views You can choose from the following settings: 1 view (no splitting of
the screen), 2 views.
Switch Windows Switches the active window on the waveform display screen among p.65
W1 through W8.
For more information about window switching, see:
 Switching Windows (p.65)
Toggle Cursor Switches the active cursor among the following: trace cursor, A p.65
cursor, and B cursor.
For more information about how to move cursors, see:
 Moving Cursors (p.65)
Display All Displays waveforms on the waveform display screen in their
entirety.
Adjust Position Adjusts the position of the vertical axis of the waveforms being p.72
displayed on the waveform display screen.
For more information about adjusting the position, see:
 Adjusting the Position of the Waveform's Vertical Axis (p.72)
Move Toggles move mode on and off.
On: Dragging the mouse’s left button moves (scrolls) the
waveform.
Off: Dragging the mouse’s left button enlarges the waveform’s
rectangle.
Display Time Axis Switches the method used to display the time axis.
Absolute time: Switches the time axis display method to absolute
time.
The absolute time display uses the following format:
Waveform’s Waveform’s Display format
overall overall
duration minimum interval
1 day or more 1 second or more yyyy-MM-dd
HH:mm:ss
Less than 1 yyyy-MM-dd
second HH:mm:ss.fff
Less than 1 day 1 second or more HH:mm:ss
Less than 1 HH:mm:ss.fff
second

Relative time (auto):

Switches the time axis display method to elapsed time using the
start position of each measurement parameter’s waveform as the
zero point. The elapsed time is displayed using units that are
determined automatically based on the waveform’s overall
duration.
Relative time (seconds):
Switches the time axis display method to elapsed time using the
start position of each measurement parameter’s waveform as the
zero point. Elapsed time is displayed in seconds.
Relative time (point) :
The display method of the time axis changes to the number of data
points starting from the start position in the waveform of each
measurement item.

64 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Display Numerical Axis Switches the method used to display the numerical axis.
Separate axis for each channel: Displays a separate numerical
axis for each measurement parameter (channel).
Single axis for all channels: Displays a single numerical axis for
all displayed measurement parameters (channels).
Display Settings Configures display settings for the waveforms being displayed on p.66
the waveform display screen.
For more information about display settings, see:
 Configuring Waveform Display Settings (p.66)
Output CSV Outputs measurement data in CSV format. p.69
For more information about CSV output, see:
 Outputting Measurement Data as a CSV File (p.69)

Save Waveform Image Copies an image of the waveforms being displayed on the p.70
waveform display screen to the clipboard.
Saves an image of the waveforms being displayed on the waveform
display screen to a file.
For more information about saving waveform images, see:
 Saving Waveform Images (p.70)
Power analysis mode Opens the [Power analysis mode] window. This button will be p.88
displayed if PW8001 measurement data contains harmonic data.
For more information about power analysis mode, see
 Displaying Power Analysis Mode (p.88).

Switching Windows

This section describes how to switch the active window on the waveform display screen among W1 through
W8.
The Time-series Viewer can maintain up to eight windows with combinations of different waveforms in
different display states (displayed measurement parameters or display range). By switching windows, you
can call up each window’s display state.

Example 1 : With one waveform view

•With W1 as the active window •When switching the active window to W3

Example 2 : With two waveform views

•With W1 as the active window •When switching the active window to W3

Moving Cursors

This section describes how to switch the active cursor among the following: trace cursor, A cursor, and B
cursor.

65 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Types of cursors Description

Trace cursor This cursor is used to trace measured values.

A cursors These cursors are used to set ranges. There are two types:
•A and B cursors (used to set a range in the time axis direction)
•Horizontal A and B cursors (used to set a range in the numerical axis direction)
B cursors
Note
The horizontal A and B cursors set a range in the numerical axis direction for each
measurement parameter.

Cursors can be moved using either of the following two methods:

Method 1: Drag the cursor mark or cursor line with the left mouse button.

*The cursor will track measurement points for the currently active measurement parameter as it moves.

Method 2: Switch cursors with the [Toggle Cursor] button and then click the top part of the waveform
display area.

*The cursor will move to the measurement point for the measurement parameter (channel) that currently
has focus that is closest to the position at which you clicked.
*The horizontal A and B cursors cannot be moved using this method.

Configuring the Display

This section describes how to configure display settings for the waveforms being displayed on the waveform
display screen.

66 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

See the tables below for settings available on each screen.

■[General] tab
Setting Description
Display Legend Specifies whether to display the legend on the waveform display screen.
Background Color Specifies the background color to use for the waveform display screen.
Legend Display area Specifies where to display the legend.
Inside plot region
Outside plot region
Font Specifies the font size and style to use for the legend.
Display parameters Specifies what to show in the legend. (Multiple values can be selected.)
Instrument name (model#serial number)
Channel display name
Unit

■[Time axis (X)] tab

Setting Description
Axis Display Specifies whether to display the axis.
Display format Specifies the display format to use for the axis.
Absolute time
Relative time
Axis title Display Specifies whether to display the axis title.
Font Specifies the font size, style, and color to use for the axis title.
Scale Display Specifies whether to display the scale.
Display position Specifies where to display the scale.
Outside: Display outside the time axis.
Inside: Display inside the time axis.
Intersection: Display so that the scale intersects with the time axis.
Color Specifies the color to use for the scale.
Scale labels Font Specifies the font size and style to use for the scale label.
Grid lines Display Specifies whether to display grid lines.
Line width Specifies the thickness to use for grid lines.
Line type Specifies the line type to use for grid lines.
Color Specifies the color to use for grid lines.
Margins Between scale labels and scales Specifies the margin to leave between the scale label and scale line.
Between axis titles and scale Specifies the margin to leave between the axis title and scale label.
labels
Operation Display entire graph when On: Change to the overall display in the time axis direction when the
adding a channel. selected measurement parameter changes.
Off: Do not change to the overall display in the time axis direction
when the selected measurement parameter changes.
Relative time Sets the reference position for displaying 0s when the time axis
format is "relative time".
Trigger position as 0s
The beginning as 0s

■[Numerical axis (Y)] tab

Setting Description
Axis Display Specifies whether to display the axis.

67 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Display format Specifies the display format to use for the axis.
Per channel: Display a separate numerical axis for each
measurement parameter (channel).
Same for all channels: Display a single numerical axis for all
displayed measurement parameters (channels).
Axis title Display Specifies whether to display the axis title.
Font Specifies the font size, style, and color to use for the axis title.
Scale Display Specifies whether to display the scale.
Display position Specifies where to display the scale.
Outside: Display outside the time axis.
Inside: Display inside the time axis.
Intersection: Display so that the scale intersects with the time axis.
Color Specifies the color to use for the scale.
Display the auxiliary scale. Specifies whether to display the auxiliary scale.
Scale labels Angle Specifies the angle at which to display the scale label.
Font Specifies the font size and style to use for the scale label.
Grid lines Display Specifies whether to display grid lines.
Line width Specifies the thickness to use for grid lines.
Line type Specifies the line type to use for grid lines.
Color Specifies the color to use for grid lines.
Auxiliary grid Display Specifies whether to display auxiliary grid lines.
lines
Line width Specifies the thickness to use for auxiliary grid lines.
Line type Specifies the line type to use for auxiliary grid lines.
Color Specifies the color to use for auxiliary grid lines.
Margins Between scale labels and scales Specifies the margin to leave between the scale label and scale line.
Between axis titles and scale Specifies the margin to leave between the axis title and scale label.
labels
Operation Display entire graph when On: Change to the overall display in the value axis direction when
adding a channel. the selected measurement parameter (channel) changes.
Off: Do not change to the overall display in the value axis direction
when the selected measurement parameter (channel) changes.

■[Channel] tab
Setting Description
Shared Line width Specifies the line with to use when displaying waveforms on the waveform
settings display screen.
Highlighting Specifies whether to highlight the waveform for the measurement
parameter (channel) with focus.
Highlighting-- Automatic: Use the application defaults for highlighted waveforms’ line
Specification method width and display color.
User: Specify the line width and display color to use for highlighted
waveforms.
Highlighting--Line width Specifies the line with to use for highlighted waveforms.
Highlighting--Color Specify the color to use for highlighted waveforms.
Channel Channel Specifies the measurement parameter (channel) to which to apply the
settings.
Display Specifies the selection state of the measurement parameter (channel).
Color Specifies the waveform display color to use for the measurement parameter
(channel).
Instrument name Displays the instrument name for the measurement parameter (channel).
*This setting cannot be changed.
Display name Specifies the display name for the measurement parameter (channel).

■[Cursors] tab
Setting Description
Trace cursor Display Specifies whether to display trace cursors and the line width, line type, and
color to use when displaying them.
Operation Specifies whether to display cursor values in the plot region.
A and B cursors Display Specifies whether to display the A and B cursors and the line width, line
type, and color to use when displaying them.
Operation Specifies whether to display cursor values in the plot region.
Horizontal A and B Display Specifies whether to horizontal A and B cursors and the line width, line
cursors type, and color to use when displaying them.
Operation Specifies whether to display cursor values in the plot region.
Display parameters Display Specifies the parameters to display as cursor values. (Multiple values can
parameters be selected.)
Instrument name (model#serial number)
Channel display name

68 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Cursor location value (unit)

■[Events] tab
Setting Description
User events Display--Display Specifies whether to display user event marks.
Display--Display Specifies the parameters to display as user event mark information.
parameters (Multiple values can be selected.)
Time Comment
Operation Specifies whether to enable operation related to user event marks.
(Multiple values can be selected.)
Display information about event marks on mouseover.
Enter a comment when adding an event marker.
Search events Display--Display Specifies whether to display search event marks.
Display--Display Specifies the parameters to display as search event mark information.
parameters (Multiple values can be selected.)
Analysis type Threshold value Instrument name (model#serial number)
Channel display name Time Comment
Trigger point marks Display Specifies whether to display trigger marks.
Dislay--Display Specifies the parameters to display as trigger point mark information.
parameters (Multiple values can be selected.)
Trigger type Time

Outputting Measurement Data as a CSV File

This section describes how to output measurement data in the CSV format.

Item Description
Output settings Channel Specifies the measurement parameters (channels) to output as a CSV file.
Displayed channels: Of the measurement parameters (channels) loaded in
the Time-series Viewer, output the measurement parameters (channels)
that are being displayed on the waveform display screen.
All channels: Output all measurement parameters (channels) loaded in the
Time-series Viewer.
Output range Specifies the time range to output as a CSV file.
All data: Output the entire time range.
Between A and B cursors: Output the time range defined by the A and B
cursors.
Time axis format Indicates whether the time format being output to the CSV file is absolute
or relative.
*This setting can be changed using the [Display Numerical Axis] button on
the waveform toolbar.
*This setting cannot be changed on this screen.
Data completion Specifies whether to complete measured values for times for which there is
no measurement data before outputting data with measurement
parameters (channels) with different interval times in the data being

69 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

output.
No: Do not complete measured values for times without measurement
data.
Complete using last measured data: Complete measured values using the
last measured value for times without measurement data.
Data thinning Specifies whether to thin intermediate data points when outputting the
data to a CSV file.
This setting is not available when there are measurement parameters
(channels) with different interval times in the data being output.
Example:
1: No data thinning
2: Outputting 1 point for every 2 points
3: Outputting 1 point for every 3 points
...
Number of Specifies the number of decimal places applied to measured values.
decimal places
Comment Specifies a comment to include in the CSV comment header.
[Output CSV] button Outputs the data to a CSV file.
[Cancel] button Cancels the CSV output operation.
[Close] button Closes the dialog box.

Outputting Waveform Images

•This section describes how to copy an image of the waveforms being displayed on the waveform display
screen to the clipboard.
•It also describes how to save an image of the waveforms being displayed on the waveform display screen to
a file.

Item Description
Output format Specifies the format to use when outputting the image.
PNG format: Specifies PNG as the image output format.
y: Specifies EMF (enhanced metafile) as the image output format.
[Save Image] button Saves the image to the file.
[Copy to Clipboard] button Copies the image to the clipboard.
[Close] button Closes the dialog box.

70 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

□3 Waveform Display Screen

This area of the screen displays waveforms.
It allows you to zoom in and out, scroll, and otherwise interact with waveforms.

Zooming in / Zoom out / Move Waveform

This section describes how to zoom in / zoom out /move a waveform.

Operations Descriptions
Zoom in/out ■Zoom in/out
(Mouse wheel) - Rotate the mouse wheel on the waveform screen to expand and contract the entire waveform
both vertically and horizontally.

■Zoom in/out horizontally

- Rotate the mouse wheel on the bottom 5% of the waveform screen to zoom in/out the entire
waveform horizontally.
- Rotate the mouse wheel on the time axis (X-axis) to zoom in/out the entire waveform
horizontally.

■Zoom in/out vertically

- Rotate the mouse wheel on the 5% left side of the waveform screen to zoom in/out the entire
waveform vertically.
- Rotate the mouse wheel on the value axis (Y-axis) to zoom in/out vertically the entire waveform
of the channel belonging to the value axis.

Zoom in ■Zoom in
（Rectangle area） Drag the left mouse button on the waveform screen to zoom in the entire waveform with the
rectangle area .

■Zoom in horizontally
Drag the left mouse button on the bottom 5% of the waveform screen to zoom in the entire
waveform with the rectangle area horizontally.
Drag the left mouse button on the time axis (X-axis) to zoom in the entire waveform with the
rectangle area horizontally.

■Zoom in vertically
Drag the left mouse button on the 5% left side of the waveform screen to zoom in the entire
waveform with the rectangle area vertically.
Drag the left mouse button on the value axis (Y-axis) to zoom in with the rectangle area the
entire waveform of the channel that belongs to the value axis.

■Restore rectangular expansion

Click the right mouse button on the waveform screen, and then click Restore Rectangle

expansion ( ), you can return the rectangle magnification that was

executed just before.
Display All
Click on the Display All ( ) button to display the entire waveform.
Double-click the left mouse button on the waveform screen to display the entire waveform.
Input [ESC] key to display the entire waveform.

Zoom in and out ■Zoom in and out horizontally.

（ button） ・（ ）Click the button to zoom in horizontally (time axis direction).

・（ ）Click the button to shrink the image horizontally (in the time axis direction).
Zoom in and out ■Zoom in and out horizontally.
（List） Click the right mouse button on the waveform screen and click "Time Axis Expansion" to expand
the waveform in the horizontal direction (time axis direction).
Click the right mouse button on the waveform screen and click the "Time Axis Shrink" button to
shrink the waveform in the horizontal direction (time axis direction).
Click on a time value displayed by clicking on the time axis, the section of the time value is
displayed as a waveform.

71 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Moving ■Move horizontally

(Scroll bar) Move the scroll bar at the bottom of the waveform screen to move the waveform horizontally.

Moving Move the entire waveform by keystrokes.

(Keystrokes)
■Move horizontally
[Shift]+[→] key: Move the entire waveform to the right.
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[→] keys: Move the entire waveform to the right in fine increments.
[Shift]+[←]: Move the entire waveform to the left.
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[←] keys: Move the entire waveform to the right in fine increments.

■Move vertically
[Shift]+[↑] keys: Move the entire waveform upwards.
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[↑] keys: Move the entire waveform upwards in fine increments.
[Shift]+[↓] keys: Move the entire waveform downwards.
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[↓] keys: Move the entire waveform downward in fine increments.

Displaying the Entire Waveform

This section describes how to display waveforms in their entirety.

■Click the [Display All] button

Click the [Display All] button on the waveform toolbar.
The entire waveform will be displayed on the waveform display screen.

■Double-click the mouse

Double-click the left mouse button within the plot area of the waveform display screen.
The entire waveform will be displayed on the waveform display screen.

Adjusting the Position of the Waveform

This section describes how to adjust the position of the waveform displayed on the waveform display screen
using the [Adjust Position] button on the waveform toolbar.

72 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description
Axesl position adjustment area This area has a set of scroll bars for adjusting the display range and the
display position of numerical axes in the vertical direction.

Adjusting the display range

•Drag the scroll bar with the left mouse button to select a measurement
parameter (channel). (The selected scroll bar will gain focus and turn light
blue.)
•Adjust the display range in the numerical axis direction by rotating the
mouse wheel over the selected scroll bar.

Adjusting the display position

•Drag the scroll bar with the left mouse button to select an axis. (The
selected scroll bar will gain focus and turn light blue.)
•Adjust the display position in the numerical axis direction by dragging
the left mouse button above the selected scroll bar.

All axes Revert to Initial Resets the display range and display position in the vertical direction to
Position the full display for all axes.
Arrange Evenly Automatically arranges the display range and display position in the
vertical direction for all axes so that they are spaced evenly.
Selected axes Revert to Initial Resets the display range and display position in the vertical direction to
Position the full display for the selected axes.
Arrange Evenly Automatically arranges the display range and display position in the
vertical direction for selected axes so that they are spaced evenly.
[Select multiple channels] checkbox On: Allow multiple axis to be selected. You’ll be able to adjust the position
of multiple axes within the axes position adjustment area at the same time.
Off: Allow only one axis to be selected at a time.
[Close] button Closes the dialog box.

Adding, Editing, and Deleting User Event Marks

This section describes how to add, edit, and delete user event marks.
Click the right mouse button within the plot area on the waveform display screen or over a user event mark
to display a context menu providing access to this functionality.

Context menu command Description

Add a user event. Adds a user event mark at the click location.
Edit a user event. Edits the comment of the specified user event mark.
Delete a user event. Deletes the specified user event mark.
Delete all user events. Deletes all user event marks on the waveform display screen.

73 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

□4 Channel Information Panel

The channel information panel allows you to select measurement parameters (channels) and display or edit
measured values and settings.

Item Description
■Number of selected items
Displays the number of measurement parameters (channels) that have been
selected on the waveform display screen. You can select up to 32
measurement parameters (channels).

■Display only selected channels

Displays only selected measurement parameters (channels).

■Deselect All
Deselects all selected measurement parameters (channels).

■Refine
Refines the parameters shown on the channel Information panel by
measurement parameter display name (channel display name).

■Cursor value display

Displays cursor values for trace cursors and A/B cursors.

■Instrument panel
Displays measurement parameters (channels) grouped by instrument.
You can collapse and expand the list of associated measurement parameters
by clicking an instrument.

■Checkbox
[Without focus] On: Display the waveform on the waveform display screen.
Off: Do not display the waveform on the waveform display screen.

■Channel display name

[With focus] Displays the display name of the measurement parameter (channel).

(If a comment is stored for each channel in the data logger, the comment will
appear in parentheses after the channel display name.)

■Measured value
Displays the measured value and measurement unit at the cursor location.

(If the measured value has a maximum value and a minimum value, the
two values will be displayed.)

■Edit channel display name

Allows you to edit the display name of the measurement parameter
(channel).

74 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

■Channel settings
Configures the measurement parameter (channel).

For more information, see “Configuring Channels” (p.XX).

Configuring Channels

This section describes how to configure measurement parameters (channels).

Item Description
Measured value Unit Displays and sets the measured value unit.
Unit prefix Displays and sets the measured value unit and unit prefix.
Maximum resolution Displays and sets the maximum resolution for measured values.
Number of decimal If the display format is set to [Number of significant digit]
places Specifies the maximum resolution for measured values regardless of the
unit prefix.
Specifies the value x in 𝟏. 𝟎 × 𝟏𝟎𝑿 .
If the display format is set to [Exponent]
Specifies the number of decimal places for the mantissa of measured values
expressed as exponents.
1.2345E+03
Mantissa
Display format Specifies the display format to use for measured values.
Numuber of significant digitl: Example: 0.001
Exponent: Example: 1.000E-03

75 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Preview Displays a preview of how measured values will be displayed using the
current settings.
For more information about displayed measured values, see:
 Measured Value Settings and Displayed Measured Values (p.76)

Details Provides detailed information about the measurement parameter

(channel).

Measured Value Settings and Displayed Measured Values

This section provides several examples of the relationship between measured value settings and displayed
measured values.
Measured value (*1) Measured value settings Displayed measured value
Example 123.45 V Unit prefix None 123.5 V
1 Display format Decimal
Maximum resolution -1
Example 1234.56 W Unit prefix None 1234.6 W
2 Display format Decimal
Maximum resolution -1
Example 1234.56 W Unit prefix k 1.2346 kW
3 Display format Decimal
Maximum resolution -1
Example 0.123456 V Unit prefix None 123.46E-03 V
4 Display format Exponent
Number of decimal 2
places
Example 0.123456 V Unit prefix m 123.46E+00 mV
5 Display format Exponent
Number of decimal 2
places
*1 Indicates measured values regardless of the unit prefix.

76 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Changing the display of value axes (vertical axes).

This section describes how to change the display of the vertical axes.
Click the [Y-Axis] tab of the [Channel Information] screen to display the [Y Axis Settings] screen.
You can also right-click on the waveform screen and select [Display Y-axis setting] in the menu to display
the setting screen.

Operations Descriptions
Show multiple vertical axes Select the check box of the channel which you want to display new vertical axis.
All groups of channels that belong to the same vertical axis as the selected channel are
selected.
The vertical axes are displayed in the waveform screen.

* You cannot turn off the display of the vertical axis that has the current focus on the
waveform screen.
Change the display Click the [Settings] button .
settings for the vertical The [Vertical Axis Settings] screen is displayed.
axis

77 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Change the vertical axis name and/or other settings.

Click the OK button to change the vertical axis display settings.

Grouping of vertical axis

In this viewer, the vertical axes are grouped by the settings of each channel.
See below for the relationship between each channel's settings and the vertical axes.

For automatic scale

Channel settings Corresponding features Vertical axis
-1. Axis name Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77） Consider all channels that match
-2. Unit prefix Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77） settings to be on the same value
Channel settings（p.75） axis.
-3. Unit Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77）
Channel settings（p.75）
-4. Display format Channel settings（p.75）
(Significant Digits / Exponent)
-5. Resolution Channel settings（p.75）
-6. Number of Decimal Places Channel settings（p.75）
For a fixed scale
Channel settings Corresponding features Vertical axis
-1. Axis name Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77） Consider all channels that match
-2. Unit prefix Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77） settings to be on the same value
Channel settings（p.75） axis
-3. Unit Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77）
Channel settings（p.75）
-4. Display format Channel settings（p.75）
(Significant Digits / Exponent)
-5. Resolution Channel settings（p.75）
-6. Number of Decimal Places Channel settings（p.75）
-7. Upper limit Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77）
-8. Lower limit Vertical Axis Configuration（p.77）

78 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

□5 Data Analysis Panel

The data analysis panel allows you to analyze measurement data with functionality including the
measurement Data List, Event List, waveform search, statistical analysis, and AB Cursor Value List.

Panel name Description

Measurement Data List Displays measurement data for each measurement parameter (channel) as a list.
Measurement data for the measurement parameter (channel) that currently has focus
on the waveform display screen or channel information screen will be shown.
Event List Allows you to display, edit, search for, and delete events added with the Time-series
Viewer.
For more information about the Event List, see:
* Displaying, Editing, Searching for, and Deleting Events (p.79)

Search Searches the waveform for each measurement parameter (channel) being displayed on
the waveform display screen.
For more information about search functionality, see:
* Searching Waveforms (p.81)

Analysis Performs statistical analysis for the measurement parameters (channels) being
displayed on the waveform display screen.
For more information about analysis functionality, see:
* Performing Statistical Analysis (p.84)

AB Cursor Value List AB Cursor Value List Displays the AB cursor value of the measurement item (channel)
displayed on the waveform display screen.
The channel name, A cursor value, B cursor value, B-A value, and unit are displayed.
For more information about the AB Cursor Value List, see
* AB Cursor Value List (p.87).

Displaying, Editing, Searching for, and Deleting Events

This section describes how to display, edit, search for, and delete events added with the Time-series Viewer.
For more information about how to add event marks to the Time-series Viewer, see:
* Adding, Editing, and Deleting User Event Marks (p.73)
* Searching Waveforms (p.81)

79 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description
Display Event mark Toggles display of event marks on the waveform display screen.
Refine Channel Refines the Event List by measurement parameters (channels).
Event type Refines the Event List by event type.
All User events Analysis events
Analysis type Refines the Event List by analysis type.
All Time Maximum position Minimum position Maximum local
position Minimum local position Level Window
Amount of change
Comment Refines the Event List by comment.
Event List Event List Displays events as a list.
The list includes each event’s type, time, instrument name, channel
display name, analysis type, and comment.
Context menu The following context menu commands are available for the Event List:
■Jump to This Event
Jumps to the selected event position on the waveform display screen.
■Edit This Event’s Comment
Edits the comment for the selected event.
■Move Cursor A to This Event
Moves the A cursor to the selected event position.
■Move Cursor B to This Event
Moves the B cursor to the selected event position.
■Delete This Event
Deletes the selected event.
■Delete All Events
Deletes all events in the Event List.
Information Displays information about the selected event.
[Copy to clipboard] button Copies information about the selected event to the clipboard.
[Output CSV] button Output information about the selected event to the CSV file.

80 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

User Event Marks and Search Event Marks

This section describes user event marks and analysis event marks.
Item Description
User event mark This mark indicates events that are set at a user-specified location on
the waveform display screen.
A separate Event List is maintained for user events on each of the
waveform windows (W1 through W8).
Time and comment information is stored for each event.
*Switching between [Relative time] and [Absolute time] under the
[Time axis display] settings causes all user events for the window in
question to be deleted.
For more information about how to add user event marks to the Time-
series Viewer, see:
 Adding, Editing, and Deleting User Event Marks (p.73)

Search event mark This mark indicates events that are set for individual measurement
parameters.
Time, instrument, channel, analysis type, and comment information is
stored for each event.
For more information about how to add search event marks to the
Time-series Viewer, see:
 Searching Waveforms (p.81)

Searching Waveforms

This section describes how to search the waveform for each measurement parameter (channel) being
displayed on the waveform display screen.

Item Description
Search range Specifies the search range.
All data: Output the entire time range.
Between A and B cursors: Search the time range defined by the A and
B cursors.
Search method Specifies the search method. The following methods can be specified:
Time Maximum position Minimum position Maximum local position

81 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Minimum local position Level Window

Amount of change

For more information about search methods, see:

 Search Methods (p.82)

Search Cursor type Specifies the cursor type.

location Trace cursor A cursor B cursor
[Move Cursor to This Location] Moves the cursor to the search location.
button
[Create Search Event at This Creates an search event at the search location.
Location] button
[Delete Position Information and Deletes the search position information and repeats the search.
Redo] button

Search Methods

■Time
Item Description
Channel Specifies a measurement parameter (channel).
You can select any measurement parameter (channel) displayed on the waveform display screen.
Time Specifies a time.
[Search] button Performs the search.
A search point (flag mark ) will be created at the specified time position.

■Maximum position, minimum position

Item Description
Channel Specifies a measurement parameter (channel).
You can select any measurement parameter (channel) displayed on the waveform display screen.
[Search] button Performs the search.
A search point (flag mark ) will be created at the maximum position or minimum position for the
specified measurement parameter (channel).

■Local maximum position, minimum maximum position

Item Description
Channel Specifies a measurement parameter (channel).
You can select any measurement parameter (channel) displayed on the waveform display screen.
[Search Last] Searches for the local maximum position or local minimum position for the specified measurement
button parameter (channel).
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the local maximum position or local minimum
position that exists before the current search position (which serves as the reference position).

Reference position
Search location

[Search Next] Searches for the local maximum position or local minimum position for the specified measurement
button parameter (channel).
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the local maximum position or local minimum
position that exists after the current search position (which serves as the reference position).

Reference position
Search location

■Level
Item Description

82 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Channel Specifies a measurement parameter (channel).

You can select any measurement parameter (channel) displayed on the waveform display screen.
Level Sets the level (threshold value).
You can also set the level by moving the position of the horizontal A cursor on the waveform display
screen.
Slope Sets the slope.
Rising: Search for the position at which the waveform crosses the specified level in the rising direction.
Falling: Search for the position at which the waveform crosses the specified level in the falling
direction.
[Search Last] Searches for the position at which the waveform crosses the specified measurement parameter
button (channel) level.
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the level position that exists before the current
search position (which serves as the reference position).
[Search Next] Searches for the local maximum position or local minimum position for the specified measurement
button parameter (channel).
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the level position that exists after the current
search position (which serves as the reference position).
Remarks
Slope Rising Rising Rising

Level

Slope Falling Falling Falling

Level

■Window
Item Description
Channel Specifies a measurement parameter (channel).
You can select any measurement parameter (channel) displayed on the waveform display screen.
Upper limit value Sets the upper limit value.
You can also set the upper limit value by moving the position of the horizontal A cursor on the
waveform display screen.
Lower limit value Sets the lower limit value.
You can also set the lower limit value by moving the position of the horizontal B cursor on the
waveform display screen.
In/out Searches for the position at which the specified measurement parameter (channel) enters (exits) the
window area specified by upper and lower limit values.
In: Searches for the position at which the waveform enters the window area.
Out: Searches for the position at which the waveform exits the window area.
[Search Last] Searches for the position at which the waveform crosses the specified measurement parameter
button (channel) level.
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the window position that exists before the current
search position (which serves as the reference position).
[Search Next] Searches for the local maximum position or local minimum position for the specified measurement
button parameter (channel).
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the window position that exists after the current
search position (which serves as the reference position).
Remarks

83 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

In

Window

Out

Window

■Amount of change
Item Description
Channel Specifies a measurement parameter (channel).
You can select any measurement parameter (channel) displayed on the waveform display screen.
Amount of change Sets the amount of change.
Searches for a position at which the waveform has changed by an amount that is greater than or equal
to the amount of change specified during one interval.
Interval Displays the interval time for the specified measurement parameter (channel).
This setting cannot be changed.
Increase/decrease Specifies the type (increase/decrease).
Increase: Searches for the position at which the waveform has increased by an amount that is greater
than or equal to the specified amount of change.
Decrease: Searches for the position at which the waveform has decreased by an amount that is greater
than or equal to the specified amount of change.
[Search Last] Searches for a position at which at which the specified measurement parameter (channel) has changed
button by an amount that is greater than or equal to the amount of change.
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the change position that exists before the current
search position (which serves as the reference point).
[Search Next] Searches for the local maximum position or local minimum position for the specified measurement
button parameter (channel).
A search position (flag mark ) will be created at the change position that exists after the current
search position (which serves as the reference point).
Remarks
Increase/decrease = Increase

Amount of change

Interval time

Performing Statistical Analysis

This section describes how to perform statistical analysis for the measurement parameters (channels) being
displayed on the waveform display screen.

84 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description
Analysis Analysis scope Specifies the analysis scope.
scope All data: Analyze the entire time range.
Between A and B cursors: Analyze the time range defined by the A and
B cursors.
The statistical analysis is On: Perform a statistical analysis at the time to which the A and B
performed by moving the A and B cursors were moved.
cursors. Off: Perform a statistical analysis at the time the [Analyze] button was
clicked.
Analysis type Specifies the type of analysis to perform. The following analyses can be
specified:
Average value Peak-to-peak value Maximum value Maximum value
time Minimum value Minimum value time Number of “on” events
“On” time Number of “off” events “Off” time Standard deviation
Integration Area value Integral

For more information about analysis types, see:

 Types of Statistical Analysis (p.85)

[Analyze] button Performs a statistical analysis using the specified range and analysis
type.

Types of Statistical Analysis

Model Description
Average value Calculates the average value of the waveform data.

Average value

Number of data points

ith data point

Peak-to-peak Calculates the value between the maximum value and the minimum value (peak-to-peak value).
value
Maximum value

85 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Peak-to-peak value

Minimum value

Maximum value Calculates the maximum value of the waveform data.

Maximum value Calculates the time at which the waveform data reached the maximum value.
time
Minimum value Calculates the minimum value of the waveform data.
Minimum value Calculates the time at which the waveform data reached the minimum value.
time
Number of “on” Counts how many times the waveform data’s measured value rose above the threshold value.
events
“On” time Calculates the time for which the waveform data’s measured value rose above the threshold value.
Number of “off” Counts how many times the waveform data’s measured value fell below the threshold value.
events
“Off” time Calculates the time for which the waveform data’s measured value fell below the threshold value.
Standard Calculates the standard deviation for the waveform data.
deviation
Standard deviation

Average value
Number of data points

ith data point

Integration Calculates the integrated value for the waveform data.

Integrated value

Number of data points

ith data point

Area value Calculates the area enclosed by the waveform data’s zero position and the waveform.
When the A and B cursors have been specified, calculates the area between the A and B cursors.

Area value

Number of data points

ith data point

Interval time

Area value

A cursors

B cursors
Integral value Calculates the integral for the waveform data.
Integral value

Number of data points

ith data point

Interval time

■Setting Threshold Values

When calculating the number of “on” events, “on” time, number of “off” events, and “off” time, you must set
a threshold for each measurement parameter (channel).

86 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description
Channel Specifies the channel (measurement parameter) for which the threshold is being
set.
Threshold value Specifies the threshold for the specified channel.
You can also set the upper limit value by moving the position of the horizontal A
cursor on the waveform display screen.
Apply the noise filter to threshold On: Once the measured value crosses the threshold, do not
judgment.
perform on/off judgment again until the measured value has not
crossed the threshold for 10 intervals.
Off: Perform on/off judgment whenever the measured value crosses the threshold.

AB Cursor Value List

Displays the AB cursor value of the measurement item (channel) displayed on the waveform display screen.

AB Cursor Value List Displays the channel name, A cursor value, B cursor value, B-A value, and unit.
(If the measured value has a maximum value and a minimum value, the two values will
be displayed in two lines.
Copy to clipboard Copies the contents of the AB Cursor Value List to the clipboard.
Output CSV Outputs the contents of the AB Cursor Value List to a file.

□6 Status Bar
The status bar displays cursor information.

87 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Displaying Power Analysis Mode (PW8001 only)

You can view data in power analysis mode if the measurement data loaded by the Time-series Viewer
contains harmonic measurement data.
To use power analysis mode, you must be using GENNECT One Ver. 5.20 or later.

1. Click the [Power Analysis] tool button in the Time-series Viewer.

2. Select how to open the power quality analyzer measurement data.

Option Description
Last selected channel Displays the measurement parameters selected when power
analysis mode was last opened in the Time-series Viewer.
All harmonic data saved in the power quality analyzer
measurement data will be displayed in power analysis mode.
New channel selection Allows you to select new parameters for up to 512 channels
(up to 512 channels) to display in the Time-series Viewer.
All harmonic data saved in the power quality analyzer
measurement data will be displayed in power analysis mode.
New channel selection Allows you to select new parameters for up to 512 channels
(Converted to time to display in the Time-series Viewer.
series measurement This selection is not supported in power analysis mode.
data format)

3. Select the measurement parameters you wish to import to the Time-series Viewer.
Regardless of which parameters are selected here, you can review saved harmonic data on the power
analysis function screen.
PW8001 measurement parameters are shown on the [Basic measurement parameters] and [Harmonic
measurement parameters] tabs.
For optically synchronized data, primary-side measurement parameters are shown on the [Basic
measurement parameters (Pri)] and [Harmonic measurement parameters (Pri)] tabs, while secondary-
side measurement parameters are shown on the [Basic measurement parameters (Sec)] and [Harmonic
measurement parameters (Sec)] tabs. (The PW8001’s optically synchronized measurement function is

88 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

available in firmware versions Ver. 2.00 and later.)

4. The [Power analysis mode] window will be displayed.

Supported model(s)
Power Quality Analyzer PW8001

Notes
·This function button will not be displayed if the BIN file for the loaded PW8001 power quality analyzer
measurement data does not contain harmonic data.
Harmonic data not saved in the BIN file will be treated as being in a “data empty” state and will not be
displayed by the power analysis function. Only saved parameters and orders will be displayed.

89 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

·This function button will not be displayed if BIN files for multiple sets of PW8001 power quality analyzer
measurement data have been selected in the data list.
·This function button will not be displayed if time-series measurement data created with GENNECT One
was opened.
·If the connection settings differ from the power quality analyzer’s connection settings, the application will
not be able to generate an accurate display. Wiring settings will be automatically applied for BIN files saved
by PW8001 firmware Ver. 1.53 and later.
·Processing to open large files is time-consuming.

Window Layout

The window layout shown below is used for power analysis mode.
The names and functions of interface elements are described.

Name Functionality
Displays shared controls for the [Power analysis mode] window.
① Shared controls
Use these controls to configure connection settings, add data display
tabs, revert data display tabs to their previous positions, and make
cursor movements in the Time-series Viewer.
For more information, see the following:
 Configuring connection Settings
Displays harmonic data from the loaded power quality analyzer
② Data display area
measurement data.
The display includes harmonic vectors, harmonic bar graphs, and a list
of harmonic values. The harmonic data window can be positioned as
desired.
For more information, see the following:
 Viewing Harmonic Vectors

90 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Undocking a Data Display Tab from the Main Window

You can undock a data display tab from the main window and display it as a separate window.
Click the data display tab you wish to display as a separate window and drop it onto the main window to
create a floating data display tab that is displayed as a separate window.

Docking a Data Display Tab in the Main Window

You can dock a floating data display tab in the main window.
Drag a floating data display tab and drop it in the center of the main window to dock it in the data display
area.

91 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Specifying Where to Dock a Data Display Tab

You can specify where in the main window to dock a data display area tab.
Drag a data display area tab and drop it on the cursor shown in the main window to dock it at the desired
position. You can position tabs freely by aligning the vector, bar graph, and list windows as you wish.

Reverting Window Positions

Click the [Undo] button in the shared controls to undock all docked and floating tabs and revert all data
displays to tabs.

Configuring connection Settings

If the data shown in power analysis mode was saved by a PW8001 operating on firmware earlier than Ver.
153, you’ll need to configure the wiring settings. If the settings differ from the power quality analyzer’s
wiring settings, the application will not be able to generate an accurate display. Wiring settings do not need
to be configured for PW8001 firmware Ver. 1.53 or later since they will be applied automatically. 3. Proceed
to the synchronization source settings.
1. Click the [Connection settings] button to configure the power quality analyzer’s connection settings.
Name Description
Primary (Pri) Describes the channel configuration and associated data when
making measurements with one PW8001.
Secondary Describes the secondary channel configuration and associated data
(abbreviation: when two PW8001s performed optically synchronized measurement.
Sec) (The PW8001’s optically synchronized measurement function is
available in firmware versions Ver. 2.00 and later.)

2. Once the [Connection settings] window opens, select the connection for each PW8001 channel with the
[Wiring] field. Specify the connection corresponding to the loaded data.
Only connections supported by the PW8001 can be specified (1P2W, 1P3W, 3P3W2M, 3V3A, 3P3W3M,
and 3P4W).

92 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. In the [Sync.Source] field, select the synchronization source for each connection selected in Step 2.
The selected synchronization source will be displayed in the harmonic data display area.

4. You can enter comments concerning the selected connection in the [Comment] field.
Entered comments will be shown on the bar graph screen.
Maximum number of characters that can be entered: 50 Single-byte characters

5. Click the [OK] button to close the connection settings.

Note
If the configured connections differ from the loaded data’s connections, the application will not be able to
generate an accurate display.

Adding a Data Display Tab

This section describes the name and functionality of each data display area screen.
Name and Functionality
Icon
Vector (8) Displays eight channels of voltage and current harmonic data as a
vector diagram and measured values.
Maximum number of additional tabs: 4

Vector (3) Displays three channels of voltage and current harmonic data as a
vector diagram and measured values.
Maximum number of additional tabs: 4

93 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Bar graph Displays harmonic data for each parameter as a bar graph. You can
check measured values for specific orders using the cursor function.
Maximum number of additional tabs: 3

List Displays harmonic data for each parameter as a list of values.

Maximum number of additional tabs: 3

1. Click the [Add Tab] button.

2. Click the button for the screen you wish to add on the window that opens.

3. The selected screen will be added to the data display area.

Saving the Displayed Screen (Screenshot)

This section describes how to save or copy the contents of the power analysis window to the clipboard as a
PNG image.

1. Click the [Take Screenshot] button.

2. Select whether to save or copy the displayed screen.

Controlling the Time-series Viewer Cursor

The power analysis window displays the harmonic data at the Time-series Viewer cursor’s position.
You can control the Time-series Viewer’s cursor from the power analysis window.

94 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Click the [◀] or [◀] button for the Time-series Viewer cursor to move it.

2. The data shown in the data display area will be updated to show the data at the Time-series Viewer
cursor’s position.

When the shared control buttons are selected, you can also control the Time-series Viewer’s cursor using the
left and right arrow keys on the keyboard.

Viewing Harmonic Vectors

The harmonic vector screen displays harmonic data measured with the power quality analyzer as a vector
diagram.
Select [Vector] from the [Add Tab] button on the [Power analysis mode] window to add a [Vector] tab to the
data display area.

１ ２

３ ４

1. Select the [Vector] tab on the [Power analysis mode] window.

[Vector8] represents a screen displaying voltage and current vectors as well as measured values for 8
channels, while [Vector3] represents a screen displaying voltage and current vectors as well as
measured values for 3 channels.

2. You can change which channels are displayed by clicking the [CH] buttons.
·On the [Vector8] tab, turning off a CH button will hide the vectors for that channel.
·On the [Vector3] tab, turning off a CH button will hide the vectors for that channel.

95 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Specifying an order will display the voltage and current vectors as well as measured values for that
order.
Data cannot be displayed for orders that do not exist in the loaded data. (The screen will display “Data
Empty.”)

4. You can change the size of the vectors in the vector diagram by selecting [Zoom].

5. If the loaded data consists of optically synchronized data, you can select whether to display the
primary-side data or the secondary-side data. (PW8001 Ver. 2.00 or later)

Viewing Harmonic Bar Graphs

The harmonic bar graph screen displays harmonic data measured with the power quality analyzer as a
series of bar graphs.
Select [Bar Graph] from the [Add Tab] button on the [Power analysis mode] window to add a [Bar Graph]
tab to the data display area.
You can enlarge a bar graph by dragging and dropping the mouse on top of it, and you can scroll a bar graph
by moving the mouse cursor left or right while right-clicking on it.

1. Select the [Bar Graph] tab on the [Power analysis mode] window.

2. Click a [CH selection] button to display the [CH selection] window.

From the [CH selection] window, select the parameter for which to display a bar graph.

96 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Selecting [OFF] will hide the bar graph.

You cannot set all three graphs to [OFF] at the same time.
You cannot select channels that do not exist on the PW8001.

3. Configure the [Scale] setting.

Option Description
Linear Generates a linear display. The display will include low levels.
When [Phase angle] is selected for [Measured value], the vertical
axis cannot be changed from [Linear].
Log Generates a logarithmic display.

4. Set the [Measured value].

Option Description
Amplitude Displays levels for each order’s harmonics.
Content Displays each order’s harmonics as percentages, where the
percentage fundamental wave component is 100%.
Phase angle Displays the harmonic active power phase angle, defined as the
difference between the harmonic current and voltage phases.

5. Select the order to display with [Order settings].

Option Description
All orders Displays all orders (0 to 500).
Odd orders Displays the 0th order and odd orders 1 through 499.
Even orders Displays the 0th order and even orders 2 through 500.

6. Move the order cursor displayed on the bar graphs with [Order cursor].
① [◀] button
Moves the order cursor to the right.
When the [◀] button is in the active state, you can move the order cursor to the right using the
keyboard’s right arrow key.
② [◀] button
Moves the order cursor to the left.
When the [◀] button is in the active state, you can move the order cursor to the left using the

97 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

keyboard’s left arrow key.

③ Mouse operation
You can move the order cursor by aligning the mouse cursor with the order cursor and dragging and
dropping it.

7. Display comments.
Comments specified under connection settings will be shown in this field.

8. [Reset]
Reverts any bar graphs that have been zoomed in or out to their initial zoom factor.

Viewing the Harmonic List display

The harmonic list screen displays harmonic data measured with the power quality analyzer as a list of
values.
Select [List] from the [Add Tab] button on the [Power analysis mode] window to add a [List] tab to the data
display area.
[None] will be used for display and CSV output if there is no data to display in the loaded file.

1. Select the [List] tab on the [Power analysis mode] window.

2. Click a [CH selection] button to display the [CH selection] window.

From the [CH selection] window, select the parameter for which to display the list.

98 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

You cannot select channels that do not exist on the PW8001.

3. Set [U/I/P].
Options: U/I/P

4. Set the [Measurement parameter].

Option Description
Amplitude Displays levels for each order’s harmonics.
Content Displays each order’s harmonics as percentages, where the
percentage fundamental wave component is 100%.
Phase angle Displays the harmonic active power phase angle, defined as the
difference between the harmonic current and voltage phases.

5. Set the [Displayed orders].

Selects the orders to display on one screen. You can view data by scrolling horizontally.
Options: 50/100/200

6. Select the order to display with [Order settings].

Option Description
All orders Displays all orders (0 to 500).
Odd orders Displays the 0th order and odd orders 1 through 499.
Even orders Displays the 0th order and even orders 2 through 500.

7. Exports the data as a CSV file.

Outputs the displayed harmonic parameters as a CSV file.

99 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Organize data
・In [Data Switch Window], you can manage the loaded data in the data group.
・To organize data, make a new data group, and then drag and drop the data to the group. The data group is
managed in the tree style structure.

Add the data group

Here explains how to add a new group under the [root] as an example.

1. Select a data group.

2. Click [Add] button.

*The data group is also added by selecting [Add] in the right-click menu.

3. A new data group has been added under the [root].

*You cannot add any data group under the [Not Categorized] group.

100 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Rename the data group

1. Select a data group.

2. Select [Rename] in the right-click menu.

*You cannot rename the [root] group.

*You cannot rename the [Not categorized] group.

3. Input text as the group name.

*You cannot set the empty text.

*You cannot set the text that has only white spaces.
*You cannot set the special characters like [＼(backslash)], [ . (period)], [* （asterisk）] and [ ' (apostrophe)].

4. The data group has been renamed.

101 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Move data to the data group

Here explains how to move data from the [Not Categorized] group to the [SAMPLE GROUP] group as an
example.

1. Select the [Not Categorized] group.

2. Check the data to move in the data list.

3. With the left button of the mouse pressed down, move the mouse pointer toward the [SAMPLE GROUP]
group. (drag operation)

4. As the mouse pointer approaches the [SAMPLE GROUP] group, the mouse cursor allow appears.

Move the cursor to the [SAMPLE GROUP] group and release the left button of the mouse. (drop
operation)

*Move the tip of cursor to the folder icon or the text of the group.

*You cannot move data to the [root] group.

5. Data has been moved to the [SAMPLE GROUP] group.

102 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Delete the data group

1. Select a group.

2. Click the [Delete] button.

*The data group is also deleted by selecting [Delete] in the right-click menu.

*You cannot delete the [root] group.

*You cannot delete the [Not Categorized] group.

3. The confirmation message is displayed. Click [OK] button to delete the group.

*If a group is deleted, the data that is included in the group are also deleted.

103 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Manipulate data list

In the data list of the main window, you can see the detailed information on the data, search/ refine the data,
edit the comment/title/search tags.
Here explains basic function for manipulating the data list.

Check/Uncheck data

You can specify the data for the operations like saving, deleting, moving.

1. You can check/uncheck the data by clicking the checkbox in the data list.
*You can also check/uncheck the data by selecting [Check]/[Uncheck] in the right-click menu.

2. You can check/uncheck all the data in the data list by clicking [Check All] icon or [Uncheck All] icon in the
tool bar.
Button: Check All data
Button: Uncheck All data
*You can also check/uncheck all the data in the data list by selecting [Check All]/[Uncheck All] in the right-click

menu.

104 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Collapse/Expand data list

The data is listed in the group that has the same date.
This group can be collapsed or expanded by the operation of the mouse.

1. Collapse the date group by clicking the mark in the data list.

*You can also collapse the date group by double-clicking on the any point of the group header.

2. Expand the date group by clicking the mark in the data list.

*You can also expand the date group by double-clicking on the any point of the group header.

3. Collapse all the date groups in the data list by clicking the [Collapse All] icon in the tool bar.

4. Expand all the date groups in the data list by clicking the [Expand All] icon in the tool bar.

105 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Refine data by the criteria settings

You can refine the data that is displayed in the data list by the criteria settings.
There are three criteria for refining the data: date, data type and instrument.
Here explains how to refine the data by selecting [Battery] in the data type criteria as an example.

1. Click the second combo box in the [Filter] tool bar.

2. Select the [Battery] from the drop-down list.

3. The data list has been refined by the data type of [Battery].

*If a refinement has been applied to the data list, the switch of the [Filter] is turned on
*If a refinement has been applied to the data list, the checked state of the data list is cleared.

*If [Filter] is turned off , the refinement that is applied to the data list is cleared.

106 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Search data by text

You can search data in the data list by text. The target for a search is all the data displayed in the data list.

1. Input the text in the text box of [Search].

*If you set multiple texts with spaces, the search is performed by "AND" condition.

2. Click the [Search] icon to perform a search.

3. The result of a search is displayed in the data list.

*If a refinement has been applied to the data list, the switch of the [Filter] is turned on
*If a refinement has been applied to the data list, the checked state of the data list is cleared.

*If the switch of the [Filter] is turned off , the refinement that is applied to the data list is cleared.

107 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Search data by search tag

You can search data in the data list using search tags. The target for a search is all the data displayed in the
data list.

1. Click ▼mark on the text box of the [Search].

2. Select [Search by tag] from the drop-down list.

3. [Select Tags] window is displayed. Click [OK] button, after selecting the tags to search by checking.

*If you set multiple tags, the search is performed by "AND" condition.

4. The result of a search is displayed in the data list.

*If a refinement has been applied to the data list, the switch of the [Filter] is turned on
*If a refinement has been applied to the data list, the checked state of the data list is cleared.

*If the switch of the [Filter] is turned off , the refinement that is applied to the data list is cleared.

108 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Edit title/comment

Here explains how to edit comment in the data list.

1. Select a data in the data list.

2. Click twice on a cell of the [Comment] to start editing.

*You can also start editing by pressing [F2] key after clicking the cell of the [Comment] column.

*You can also start editing by selecting [Edit Comment] in the right-click menu.

3. Edit the comment.

4. Press [Enter] key to finish editing.

109 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Set search tag

You can set search tags to the data in the data list.

1. Select a data in the data list.

2. Click a cell of the [Search Tag] column.

3. [Set Search Tag] window is displayed. Click [OK] button, after selecting tags to set by clicking.

*If you would like to add new tags or delete the existing tags, click [Edit Tag] button.

4. The tags are set to the data.

110 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Edit search tag

You can add new search tags or delete existing tags.

1. Select a data in the data list.

2. Click a cell of the [Search Tag] column.
3. [Set Search Tag] window is displayed. Click [Edit Tag] button.

4. [Edit Tag] window is displayed.

5. To add a new tag, click [Add Tag] button after setting a tag text.
6. To delete the existing tag, click the [Delete] icon.

*Even after the existing tag in the [Edit Tag] window, the tag that is set to the data in the data list still exists
*Tags that is deleted in the [Edit Tag] window are not used for searching.

111 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Output data
Output data in HOKI GENNECT Format（.hok）

This section describes how to output one measured data in HIOKI GENNECT Format（.hok）.

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select one data by checking data on the data list and click [Export]
button.

2. [Export Format] window is displayed. Select [HIOKI GENNECT Format] and click [OK].

3. [Select destination to export] window is displayed. Click [Save] button, after specifying the file.

112 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. Data has been saved as HIOKI GENNECT Format（.hok）.

Output data in ZIP Format

This section describes how to output measurement file in ZIP format.

This feature supports following data types.
 PQA Measurement Data
 POWER LOGGER Measurement Data
 Power Analyzer measurement data
 DATA LOGGER Waveform
 MEMORY HiCORDER Waveform
 Picture

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select one data by checking data on the data list and click [Export]
button.

2. [Export Format] window is displayed. Select [ZIP Format] and click [OK].

113 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. [Browse For Folder] window is displayed. Click [OK] button, after specifying the folder.

4. Data has been saved in ZIP format.

Output data in CSV/Image format

This section describes how to output data in CSV/Image format.
CSV output feature supports following data types.
 General Measurement
 Battery
 Time series measurement data
 Instrument data
This function converts the measurement device data in the following table into a CSV file in time
series format and outputs it.
(*1) The format is different from the CSV file that can be saved in the measurement device itself.
Data files with more than 512 channels can be exported in CSV format.
Data format Supported instruments Firmware version Remarks
Data logger waveforms (binary) LR8400 series ― (*1)
LR8410
LR8450,LR8450-01 Ver. 1.50 or later
Power logger measurement data (measurement data PW3360 ― (*1)
folders) PW3365
Power Analyzer measurement data (binary) PW8001 Ver. 1.00 or later (*1)
LR5000 series measurement data (HRP2 format) LR5000 series ― (*1)

Image output feature supports following data types.

 Picture
 Waveform Image, General Measurement Image, Battery Image

Output data in CSV/Image format (Single data selection)

This section describes how to output one measured data in CSV format.

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select one data by checking data on the data list and click [Export]
button.

114 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. [Export Format] window is displayed. Select [CSV/Image Format] and click [OK].

3. [Select destination to export] window is displayed. Click [Save] button, after specifying the file.

※ If the selected data is an Image type, the extension(JPG/PNG/BMP/GIF) can be specified in [Save as type].

4. Data has been saved in CSV format.

*If the selected data contains Image type, all the image data is saved in Image format.

115 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Output data in CSV/Image format (Multiple data selection)

This section describes how to output the multiply selected data in CSV/Image format.

1. Select [Data] and a data group, then select one data by checking data on the data list and click [Export]
button.

2. [Export Format] window is displayed. Select [CSV/Image Format] and click [OK].

3. [Browse For Folder] window is displayed. Click [OK] button, after specifying the folder.

※ If the multiple data is exported, the extension(JPG/PNG/BMP/GIF) of the image data is saved in PNG format.

116 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. Data has been saved.

Output PDF file

Output PDF file (Single data selection)

1. Select [Report] and a data group, then select one data by checking data on the data list and click
[Export] button.

2. [Export Format] window is displayed. Select [PDF Format] and click [OK].

3. [Select destination to export] window is displayed. Click [Save] button, after specifying the file.

4. Data has been saved as PDF.

117 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Output PDF files (Multiple data selection)

1. Select [Report] and a data group, then select one data by checking data on the data list and click [Export]
button.

2. [Browse For Folder] window is displayed. Click [OK] button, after specifying the folder.

3. Data has been saved as PDF.

118 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Delete data
1. Select the data to delete by checking data on the data list.

2. Click [Delete] button.

3. The confirmation message is displayed. Click [OK] button to delete the data.

119 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Changing instrument settings (instrument configuration modification

function)
·Acquire the current settings from the instrument.
·Change the instrument settings.
·The time when the settings are acquired (when launching [Instrument Settings]) is used as the time, which
cannot be changed.
*If an instrument’s settings cannot be changed due to its status, for example because it is recording
(automatically saving data), make changes after placing it in a state that allows settings to be changed.
*Refer to the following for information on the battery tester's setting functions.
 Settings for Battery Tester BT3554/BT3554-01/BT3554-50

Supported instruments
The instrument configuration modification function supports the following instruments:
Model Name Firmware URL
version
PW3360 Clamp On Power Logger Ver. 3.21 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp
later /products/detail/?product_key=235
PW3365 Clamp On Power Logger Ver. 2.10 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp
later /products/detail/?product_key=228
PW3335 Power Quality Analyzer Ver. 1.11 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp
later /products/detail/?product_key=660
PW3336 Power Quality Analyzer Ver. 1.23 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products
later /detail/?product_key=405
PW3337 Power Quality Analyzer Ver. 1.23 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp
later /products/detail/?product_key=287

Limitations

Instrument configuration modification function has following limitations.

feature limitation remarks

Number of units that can be operated 1 unit

simultaneously.

Number of units that can be set for other 1 unit

devices simultaneously.

Instrument configuration modification function has following limitations about the network configuration.
feature limitation remarks

Interface LAN

Network range for auto instrument detection. □.□.□.2 – □.□.□.254

※The network range must be in the same

range as the computer.

DHCP Not supported

Workflow

120 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Connect an instrument to a computer with a LAN cable (p.17)

Change the instrument’s settings (p.121)

Change the instrument's settings

1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

2. Select the [LAN] navigation bar.

3. Click the [Hardware settings] ( ) button.

4. The [Instrument Settings] screen will open. The model and serial number of the selected instrument will
be shown. When the settings from an instrument are acquired and the window is opened, the instrument’s
settings will be displayed.

121 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

However, a warning message will be shown if the instrument is in a state that does not allow settings to
be configured (for example, when recording is in progress).

To change the instrument's settings, select [Yes] ( ) to place the instrument in a state that
allows changes to settings.

5. You can initialize the instrument by clicking the [Initialize settings] button ( ).

6. For more information about instrument settings, position the cursor over the box for changing a setting to
display a description of the setting in question. A description is shown to the right of some settings boxes.

Positioning the cursor over a setting for which the caution mark ( ) is shown will display precautionary
information concerning the setting.
To change the settings page, click one of the tabs (for example,

).
Instrument settings are configured by either selecting an option (for example,

) or entering text (for example, ). To

configure a setting that involves selecting an option, click the setting to display the options and then
select one to configure the instrument accordingly. To configure a setting that involves entering text, click

the setting to open an input window, enter the desired text, and click the [Accept] button ( )
to configure the instrument accordingly.
Once the setting has been applied to the instrument, a message indicating that fact
( ) will be shown to the right of the settings box.

7. To save the current instrument settings, click the button for saving the settings as a file ( ). When the

122 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

[Save File] window opens, specify the destination folder and filename and save the file.

8. To load a previously saved file of instrument settings, click the button for loading a settings file ( ).

When the [Load File] window opens, specify the file and filename and load the settings, which will be
applied to the instrument. In general, you must use settings with an instrument of the same hardware
configuration.
However, when loading a settings file with an instrument like the PW337 whose functionality varies
with the installed options, note the following:
·When you load a settings file saved for an instrument not equipped with an option on an instrument
that is equipped with that option, settings for the option will not change.
9. If the settings shown in the application no longer match those shown on the [Instrument Settings] screen

because the instrument has been operated directly, click the button for reacquiring all settings ( ). The

instrument’s settings and the settings shown on the [Instrument Settings] screen will then match.
10. If there are multiple instances of the same instrument to connect to, other instruments’ settings will be
shown on the [Instrument Settings] screen.

To use the instrument’s settings to configure another instrument, select the serial number of the

instrument you wish to configure and click the [Send] button ( ). Once the settings have been
applied to the specified instrument, a message indicating that fact will be shown.

However, when configuring an instrument like the PW337 whose functionality varies with the installed
options, note that only the settings shown in the instrument settings will be applied to the instrument.

123 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

11. Click the [Close] button ( ) to exit the [Instrument Settings] screen.

Settings for Battery Tester BT3554/BT3554-01/BT3554-50

1. Connect the Battery Tester with the computer.

※ To communicate with the Battery Tester by USB connection cable, the USB driver package must be installed on the
computer.

※ See INSTALL THE USB DRIVER PACKAGE for how to install the USB driver of BT3554 series.
※ See the instruction manual for how to install the USB driver of the earlier product 3554.

※ Please note that the earlier product 3554 is NOT supported by Windows 8 or later.

2. Open GENNECT One.

3. Select [Console] tab.

4. Choose the [USB] interface and then click [Update] button.

124 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. To start the instrument setting, choose the connected instrument from the list and then click
button.

5. [Settings on Battery Tester] window is displayed.

Set the clock on instrument

1. Select [Set Clock].

2. Click [Set] button. The clock of the battery tester is set by the computer.

125 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Delete Memory on instrument

1. Select [Delete Memory].

2. Select the memory unit to delete. And click [Delete] button.

3. The selected memory unit is deleted.

Import Threshold

1. Select [Import Threshold].

126 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. Select the import source. Here, select BT3554-50 Battery Tester as the source.

*If you would like to import threshold from GENNECT Cross for Android/iOS, select [File] as the source.

3. Click [Import] button to import threshold.

How to share and manage threshold tables in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro subscribers can
use this feature), please refer to the following
 Share battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)
 Manage battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

Create the new threshold table

1. Select [Manage Threshold]. The list of threshold tables is displayed.

2. Click [New] button. [Input Table Name] window pops up. Set the name of the new threshold table.

127 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

128 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. [Edit Threshold Table] window is displayed.

4. Click [Close] button to save threshold table.

How to share and manage threshold tables in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro subscribers can
use this feature), please refer to the following
 Share battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)
 Manage battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

Delete the threshold table

1. Select [Manage Threshold]. The list of threshold tables is displayed.

129 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. Click [Delete] button. The confirmation message is displayed. Click [OK] button to delete the threshold
table.

How to share and manage threshold tables in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro subscribers can
use this feature), please refer to the following
 Share battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)
 Manage battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

Transfer the threshold table to Battery Tester

1. Select [Manage Threshold]. The list of threshold tables is displayed.

2. Click [Open] button. [Edit Threshold Table] window is displayed.

130 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Click [Transfer] button. All data in the threshold table (From No.1 to No.200) will be transferred to
Battery Tester.

131 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Edit the threshold table

1. Select [Manage Threshold]. The list of threshold tables is displayed.

2. You can duplicate the table in the list by clicking the [Duplicate] button.
3. You can import from a file (hok format) by clicking the [Import] button.
4. You can export to a file (hok format) by clicking the [Export] button.

5. Click [Open] button. [Edit Threshold Table] window is displayed.

132 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

6. Select the threshold to edit by clicking.

*Data is also selected in number order, by clicking.

*Data is also selected by setting data number.

7. Click [Set] button, after setting Name, R Range, R Warning, R Fail, V Range, V Warning and Voltage
Judgement (BT3554-50).

133 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

8. The threshold has been set to the data of No.2.

Import Profile (BT3554-50)

1. Select [Import Profile].

2. Select the import source. Here, select BT3554-50 Battery Tester as the source.

134 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

*If you would like to import profile from GENNECT Cross for Android/iOS, select [File] as the source.

3. Click [Import] button to import profile.

How to share and manage profiles tables in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro subscribers can use
this feature), please refer to the following.
 Share battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)
 Manage battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

Create the new profile table (BT3554-50)

1. Select [Manage Profile]. The list of profile tables is displayed.

2. Click [New] button. [Input Table Name] window pops up. Set the name of the new profile table.

135 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. [Edit Profile Table] window is displayed.

4. Click [Close] button to save profile table.

How to share and manage profiles tables in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro subscribers can use
this feature), please refer to the following.
 Share battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)
 Manage battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

Delete the profile table (BT3554-50)

3. Select [Manage Profile]. The list of profile tables is displayed.

136 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. Click [Delete] button. The confirmation message is displayed. Click [OK] button to delete the profile
table.

How to share and manage profiles tables in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro subscribers can use
this feature), please refer to the following.
 Share battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)
 Manage battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

Transfer the profile table to Battery Tester (BT3554-50)

1. Select [Manage Profile]. The list of profile table is displayed.

2. Click [Open] button. [Edit Profile Table] window is displayed.

137 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Click [Transfer All] or [Transfer Selected] button. Data in the profile table will be transferred to
Battery Tester.

Edit the profile table (BT3554-50)

1. Select [Manage Profile]. The list of profile table is displayed.

2. You can duplicate the table in the list by clicking the [Duplicate] button.
3. You can import from a file (hok format) by clicking the [Import] button.

138 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. You can export to a file (hok format) by clicking the [Export] button.

5. Click [Open] button. [Edit Profile Table] window is displayed.

6. Select the profile to edit by clicking.

*Data is also selected in number order, by clicking.

*Data is also selected by setting data number.

139 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

7. Click [Set] button, after setting Location Information, Device Information, Battery No.(Start), Battery
No. (End), Memory Unit and NO.

*To clear the contents, click the [Clear] button.

8. The profile has been set to the data of No.2.

140 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Measured values with the logging feature (Logging Function [LAN])

・[Logging] feature monitors or log measured values with measurement channels and logging interval
specified.
・This feature saves the measurement files in the application’s database.
※ This feature supports the real-time measurement via LAN communication.
※ See the following sections to see the measured data or to export measured data in the CSV format.
 View Logging data
 Output measurement data to CSV file
See the following sections for details on how to use the Time-series(Logging) Viewer
 Using the Time-series/Logging Viewer
※ Since V5.10, logging can be started up to 8 times at the same time.

Supported instruments

[Logging] (real-time measurement) feature supports following instruments.

Model Name Product Name Firmware URL

Ver.

PQ3100 *1 POWER QUARITY V2.10 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6387

ANALYZER Later

PQ3198 *1,*2 POWER QUALITY V1.10 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6503

ANALYZER Later
PW3335 *2,*3,*6 POWER METER V1.11 or later https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/single-
phase-ac-dc/id_5831
PW3336 *2,*3,*6 POWER METER V1.23 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-
later meters/3phase-ac-dc/id_5805
PW3337 *2,*3,*6 POWER METER V1.23 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-
later meters/3phase-ac-dc/id_5929
PW3360 *1 CLAMP ON POWER V3.10 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5589
LOGGER Later
PW3365 *1 CLAMP ON POWER V2.00 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5565
LOGGER Later
PW3390 *2 POWER ANALYZER V2.00 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6413
Later
PW6001 *2 POWER ANALYZER V3.02 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5796
Later
PW8001 *2,*4,*5,*7 POWER ANALYZER V1.00 https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/power-
or later analyzer/id_412384
LR8400, LR8401, LR8402 MEMORY HiLOGGER V1.21 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5613
*1 Later

LR8410 *1 WIRELESS LOGGING V1.42 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5697

STATION Later
LR8450, LR8450-01 *1,*8 MEMORY HiLOGGER V1.20 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6535
Later
MR6000 *1 MEMORY HiCORDER V2.12 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6439
Later
BT5525 *1 BATTERY V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/electrical-safety-
INSULATION Later testers/insulation/id_1265405
TESTER
ST5680 *1 DC HIPOT TESTER V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/electrical-safety-
Later testers/hipot/id_1265574
IM3523A *1 LCR METER V1.02 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/lcr-meters/10-
Later mhz/id_1265475
RM3545A*1 RESISTANCE METER V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/resistance-
Later meters/resistance/id_1266279
（The RM3545A does not support measurement time longer
than 1 minute, so reduce the measurement SPEED,

141 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

AVERAGE, DELAY, OVC, and number of channels so that

the measurement time is less than 1 minute.）

*1 If the measurement of instrument is stop state when the measurement is started by this function, it will shift to the start state.
*2 If the measurement of instrument is stop state when the measurement is started by this function, it will shift to the start state.
*3 All of the analysis data of the measurement instrument is reset by starting the measurement with this feature. It is recommended
to use this feature after the recording and analysis of the measurement data has been completed (Data reset state).
*4 All of the integrated data of the measurement instrument is reset by starting the measurement with this feature. It is
recommended to use this feature after the recording and analysis of the integration data has been completed (Data reset state).
*5 If the setting of integration by each wiring is enabled on the instrument when measurement is started using this function, The
setting is changed to integration by all wires.
*6 If the version of this application is less than V5.10, acquisition of harmonic items is not supported. Please upgrade this application
to V5.10 or later.
*7 Do not use "," or ";" as a unit when setting the user-defined function (UDF) of the main unit.
*8 Do not use "," or ";" as a unit when setting the waveform calculation and scaling functions of the main unit.

Limitations

[Logging] (real-time monitoring/logging) feature has following limitations.

feature limitation remarks

Number of concurrent logging executions 8 Since V5.10

Maximum number of channels 512 channels + 16 channels Up to 32 channels can be displayed on the graph

(inter-channel calculation and the data list.

* When multiple logging is executed, the total
channels)
number of logging channels must not exceed the
limit.
* When multiple logging is executed, the number of
Maximum number of instruments 30 instruments
logging connected measuring instruments must not
exceed the limit.
* When multiple logging is executed, the same
instrument cannot be specified for multiple
logging.
Interface LAN

Logging Interval 1/2/5/10/30 s The application determines the minimum logging

1/2/5/10/30 min interval by measuring the time for getting measured

1 hour values of selected channels.

* When multiple logging is executed, the total
Maximum number of inter-channel calculation 16 (Z1 to Z16)
number of channels for inter-channel calculations
channels must not exceed 16 channels.

Data segmentation 1 day/1 hr.

When logging is enabled:
Automatic output (daily report) save interval 1 day
→ Automatically generated daily at 23 hr. 59
min. 59 sec.
When logging stopped:
→ Automatically generated when logging stops
1 day/1 hr. When logging is enabled:
Automatic output (CSV) save interval
→ 1 day: Automatically generated daily at 23 hr.
*As determined by data
59 min. 59 sec.
segmentation setting → 1 hr.: Automatically generated daily at XX hr.
59 min. 59 sec.
When logging stopped:
→ Automatically generated when logging stops

Automatic output (daily report) format Excel

[Logging] (real-time monitoring/logging) feature has following limitations about the network configuration.
feature limitation remarks

Interface LAN

142 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Network range for auto instrument detection. □.□.□.2 – □.□.□.254

※The network range must be in the same

range as the computer.

DHCP Not supported

143 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Overview of the measurement

Follow the steps below to start or stop logging.

To communicate measurement instruments by LAN cable (p.17)

Start logging (p.144)

Select instrument(s) (p.145)

Select channels (p.146)

Configure the logging settings (p.150)

Stop logging (p.153)

Start logging

Start logging

1. Click [Measurement], then click [Logging].

144 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Select instrument(s)

1. [Select Instrument] window is displayed.

“Searching instruments” message will be displayed until the application finishes searching the
instruments connected to the computer.

2. The instruments found in the step 1 will be listed.

※ To search instruments again, click button.

※ When the "Update Automatically" checkbox is turned OFF, automatic search for measuring instruments is not
performed when this screen is opened.
When the "Update Automatically" checkbox is checked ON, automatic search for measuring instruments is
performed when this screen is opened.

※ If the found instrument has never connected in this application, the instrument will be listed like following.

If you want to connect this instrument, select the instruments’ model in the [instrument] combo box.

※ If you want to add the instrument that has not been found in the [Update], input the IP address directly in the [Set
the IP address] textbox and select the instruments’ model in the [instrument] combo box.

145 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

※ To check the connection, select [Check Connection] in the right click menu.

It will become the following displays if the communication with the instruments is disrupted.

※ To delete the instrument, select [Delete] in the right click menu.

3. Select the instruments for logging. Click [Start] to go to next step.

※ The status with light-green color means that the instrument is discovered but not connected. To connect the
instrument, double-click on the status icon or click [Start] button.

Connected： Green（ ）

Discovered： Light-green（ ）
Disconnected： Red（ ）

Select channels (Setting Calculation Channels)

1. [Channel Selection] window is displayed.

“Collecting measurement channels.” message will be displayed until the application finishes collecting

146 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

the available channels of instruments.

2. Available channels are displayed in the list.

※ To search available channels again, click button.

※ In PQ3100,PQ3198,PW3360,PW3365,PW3335*,PW3336*,PW3337*,PW8001 (with harmonics analysis only), you can
select the harmonics measurement channels by selecting the drop down list of measurement items.

*If the version of this application is less than V5.10, the acquisition of harmonic items for PW3335,
PW3336, and PW3337 is not supported. Please upgrade this application to V5.10 or later.

※ Measurement items of some instruments, such as PW3336, PW8001, PQ3198 are displayed with an
identification name (e.g. PWP, MUpk). Please refer to the following for the correspondence between the
identification name and the measurement item name.

147 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

 Identification name and measurement item name in Logging and Dashboard function
※ If the number of measurement parameters for normal items exceeds 1200, the page will be divided into
multiple pages. In such a case, select the page to be displayed in the combobox and switch pages.

3. Select the measurement channels by clicking check-boxes. Click [OK].

※ Up to 512 channels can be selected for logging measurement.

※ To filter the channels by channel name, input the filter text in the [Search channels by partial matches] text box.

※ To filter the channels to checked channels only, click button.

※ To select all channels displayed or to deselect all channels displayed, click button.

4. To use selected measurement channels to perform an inter-channel calculation, select the [User inter-channel

calculation] checkbox and click the [Enter Formula] button.

148 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. To use selected measurement channels to perform an inter-channel calculation, set the formula on the [Formula

Settings] dialog box.

See below for more information about the [Formula Settings] dialog box.

 Configuring detailed settings for inter-channel calculations

149 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configure the logging settings

1. [Logging Settings] window is displayed.

“Measuring the time for data acquisition” message will be displayed until the application finishes
measuring the time for data acquisition.

2. Select the logging interval from the [Logging Interval] combo box.

※ Although the logging interval can be selected from 1s/2s/5s/10s/30s/1min/2min/5min/10min/30min/1hour., the

minimum logging interval is determined by the application from the result of measuring the time for data
acquisition.

150 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

※ [Data Division] will be changed if you select the [Logging Interval]. Logging data will be divided and saved when the
time span has elapsed that is displayed in the [Data Division].

※ Logging specified in the logging schedule must be less than 1 minute.

Logging intervals exceeding 1 minute cannot be registered in the table.

3. Select the logging duration in the [Logging Duration] combobox.

Continuous： Continue logging until the logging is stopped manually.

Specified Time：Specify the duration between 1s and 30days23hours59min59s.

4. In [Data Division], select the interval at which the logging data is split and saved.
Choose from 1 day / 1 hour for data dividing.

5. Configure settings related to the reports (Daily/Weekly/Monthly).

and .CSV automatic output under [Automatic Output Settings].
Item Description

Output Daily/Weekly/ On: Automatically output the selected reports.

report Monthly *1 Off: Do not automatically output the selected reports.

Data save Specifies where to save the reports.

destination GENNECT One:

·Save the reports in the GENNECT One data list.

Folder:

151 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

·Save the reports in a user-selected directory. Click the [...] button to select the

directory in which to save the reports.

Detailed settings Configures detailed settings related to automatic output of the reports.

See below for more information about the settings.

 Configuring detailed settings for automatic output

(daily/weekly/monthly reports)
Output CSV On/off On: Automatically output CSV files based on the logging data segmentation

time (1 day/1 hr.).

Off: Do not automatically output CSV files based on the logging data

segmentation time (1 day / 1 hr.).

Data save ·CSV files are saved in a user-selected directory. Click the [...] button to select

destination the directory in which to save daily reports.

Detailed settings Configures detailed settings related to automatic output of CSV files.

See below for more information about the settings.

 Configuring detailed settings for automatic output (CSV)

*1 : If multiple logging or logging schedules are set to output the same file name at the same time, the
file name may be changed and saved.

6. To specify the start and end time of logging, click the "Period" button and set the additional logging
settings that will be displayed.
※ Logging specified in the logging schedule must be less than 1 minute.
Logging intervals exceeding 1 minute cannot be registered in the table.

152 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description

Start time Not specified : Logging starts immediately when the [Start Logging] button

is clicked.

Specify : Logging will start at the specified time when the [Start Logging]

button is clicked.

Stop time Not specified : Logging will not stop automatically.

Specify : Automatically stops logging at the specified time.

7. To start logging, click [Start Logging].

[Logging] windows will be displayed and logging will be started.

Stop logging

1. To stop logging, click [Stop Logging].

Logging will be stopped and data will be saved in the data list of the application.

Display logging tasks

When logging is started or the [Settings]-[Logging Task] menu is selected, the logging task screen is
displayed.
・ The logging task screen displays information on logging that is currently being performed and logging that has been
completed.

・ Double-clicking on the logging information displayed in the logging task screen activates the corresponding logging
screen.

153 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Screen layout

① Logging type
In case of normal logging start, "Manual" is displayed.
If logging is started from a logging table, the batch number is displayed as "[1]:Batch1"

② Batch name (when logging is started from the logging table)

Displays the batch name registered in the logging table.

③ Start time
Displays the time when logging was actually started.

④ End time
Displays the time when logging actually ended.

⑤ Logging status icon

The icon is displayed while logging is in progress and after logging has stopped.

The icon is displayed while logging is in progress, and the icon is displayed after logging

has stopped.

About the Menu

The following menus are available on the logging task screen

154 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Menu Description

Character size You can select the size of the displayed characters from four types (small,

standard, medium, and large).

The screen size is also changed according to the character size.

Stopped clear Clears all display sections after logging has been stopped.

Arrangement You can select from four types of display arrangement (one vertical row, two

columns, four columns, or one horizontal row).

Right-click on the display after logging has stopped, and the [Clear] menu will appear.
Selecting the [Clear] menu will clear only the specified display.

155 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Screen layout

① [Monitor]
・Displays the current measured value or the measured value that is selected in the data list.
The measurement channels that has been checked in the [Monitor] will be displayed in the graph(①)
and the data list (②).
※Up to 32 channels can be displayed in the graph and the data list.
※ To change the channel name, click button.

・Filter to checked button（ ）：Filters the channels to checked channels only.

・Deselect all button（ ）：Deselects all channels.
・Filter by channel name：filters the channels by channel name, input the filter text in the
[Search channels by partial matches] text box.

② [Graph]
Graph up to 600 data points are displayed. If data points exceed 600, the track bar will be displayed
for changing the graph area to display.

・Display all area button（

）：Reset the display area and change into the display mode that
always show the latest value. Double-clicking on the graph or
pressing down the [Esc] key has the same feature.
・Move button（ ）：Changes the operation mode into the mode that moves the graph area when it is
zoomed. Dragging with the mouse right button down has the same feature.

③ [Data List]
Moving the cursor over the graph will highlight the corresponding data line in the list.

④ [Title]
Input the title for the logging data.

156 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Waveform Tool Buttons

These buttons provide access to tools for displaying and manipulating waveforms.

Name Description
Toggle Cursor Switches the active cursor among the following: trace cursor, A cursor, and B
cursor.
Display All Displays waveforms on the waveform display screen in their entirety.

Adjust Position Adjusts the position of the vertical axis of the waveforms being displayed on
the waveform display screen.
Move Toggles move mode on and off.
On: Dragging the mouse’s left button moves (scrolls) the waveform.
Off: Dragging the mouse’s left button enlarges the waveform’s rectangle.
Display Time Axis Switches the method used to display the time axis.
Absolute time: Switches the time axis display method to absolute time.
The absolute time display uses the following format: “HH:mm:ss”
Relative time (auto):
Switches the time axis display method to elapsed time using the start
position of each measurement parameter’s waveform as the zero point. The
elapsed time is displayed using units that are determined automatically
based on the waveform’s overall duration.
Relative time (seconds):
Switches the time axis display method to elapsed time using the start
position of each measurement parameter’s waveform as the zero point.
Elapsed time is displayed in seconds.
Relative time (point) :
The display method of the time axis changes to the number of data points
starting from the start position in the waveform of each measurement item.
Display Numerical Axis Switches the method used to display the numerical axis.
Separate axis for each channel: Displays a separate numerical axis for each
measurement parameter (channel).
Single axis for all channels: Displays a single numerical axis for all
displayed measurement parameters (channels).
Display Settings Configures display settings for the waveforms being displayed on the
waveform display screen.
Save Waveform Image Copies an image of the waveforms being displayed on the waveform display
screen to the clipboard.
Saves an image of the waveforms being displayed on the waveform display
screen to a file.

157 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Manipulate the waveform

This section describes how to zoom in / zoom out /move a waveform.

Operations Descriptions
Zoom in/out ■Zoom in/out
(Mouse wheel) - Rotate the mouse wheel on the waveform screen to expand and contract the entire waveform
both vertically and horizontally.

■Zoom in/out horizontally

- Rotate the mouse wheel on the bottom 5% of the waveform screen to zoom in/out the entire
waveform horizontally.
- Rotate the mouse wheel on the time axis (X-axis) to zoom in/out the entire waveform
horizontally.

■Zoom in/out vertically

- Rotate the mouse wheel on the 5% left side of the waveform screen to zoom in/out the entire
waveform vertically.
- Rotate the mouse wheel on the value axis (Y-axis) to zoom in/out vertically the entire waveform
of the channel belonging to the value axis.

Zoom in ■Zoom in
（Rectangle area） Drag the left mouse button on the waveform screen to zoom in the entire waveform with the
rectangle area .

■Zoom in horizontally
Drag the left mouse button on the bottom 5% of the waveform screen to zoom in the entire
waveform with the rectangle area horizontally.
Drag the left mouse button on the time axis (X-axis) to zoom in the entire waveform with the
rectangle area horizontally.

■Zoom in vertically
Drag the left mouse button on the 5% left side of the waveform screen to zoom in the entire
waveform with the rectangle area vertically.
Drag the left mouse button on the value axis (Y-axis) to zoom in with the rectangle area the
entire waveform of the channel that belongs to the value axis.

■Restore rectangular expansion

Click the right mouse button on the waveform screen, and then click Restore Rectangle

expansion ( ), you can return the rectangle magnification that was

executed just before.
Display All
Click on the Display All ( ) button to display the entire waveform.
Double-click the left mouse button on the waveform screen to display the entire waveform.
Press [ESC] key to display the entire waveform.

Zoom in and out ■Zoom in and out horizontally.

（ button） ・（ ）Click the button to zoom in horizontally (time axis direction).

・（ ）Click the button to shrink the image horizontally (in the time axis direction).
Zoom in and out ■Zoom in and out horizontally.
（List） Click the right mouse button on the waveform screen and click "Time Axis Expansion" to expand
the waveform in the horizontal direction (time axis direction).
Click the right mouse button on the waveform screen and click the "Time Axis Shrink" button to
shrink the waveform in the horizontal direction (time axis direction).
Click on a time value displayed by clicking on the time axis, the section of the time value is
displayed as a waveform.

Moving ■Move horizontally

(Scroll bar) Move the scroll bar at the bottom of the waveform screen to move the waveform horizontally.

Moving Move the entire waveform by keystrokes.

(Keystrokes)
■Move horizontally

158 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

[Shift]+[→] key: Move the entire waveform to the right.

[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[→] keys: Move the entire waveform to the right in fine increments.
[Shift]+[←]: Move the entire waveform to the left.
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[←] keys: Move the entire waveform to the right in fine increments.

■Move vertically
[Shift]+[↑] keys: Move the entire waveform upwards.
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[↑] keys: Move the entire waveform upwards in fine increments.
[Shift]+[↓] keys: Move the entire waveform downwards.
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[↓] keys: Move the entire waveform downward in fine increments.

159 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Using the logging schedule

By using a logging schedule, logging can be started automatically with start and end times set in advance.
・ The logging information to be registered in the schedule is managed in a logging table.
・ The logging information registered in the logging table can be specified in a schedule, and up to eight
logging events can be automatically started.
・ Logging information registered in the logging table can be used to start normal logging.
・ The conditions for logging to be activated in the logging table and schedule are the same as those for normal
logging operation.
See below for conditions :
 Limitations (Logging)

Workflow

Use the logging schedule in the following steps.

Set logging settings to logging table (p.160)

Register logging settings set in the logging table as a logging schedule (p.167)

Start logging schedule (p.164)

Logging automatically starts/stops at specified times

Stop logging schedule (p.164)

Logging table

Select [Settings]-[Logging Table] menu to display the Logging Table screen.

The Logging Table screen is used to manage logging information to be registered in the schedule.
・ The following logging settings are not saved in the logging table.
It also cannot be specified in the logging run from the logging table.
Logging start time (fixed to "Not specified")
Logging stop time (fixed to "Not specified")
Logging duration time (fixed to "Continuous ")
・ The logging interval must be 1 minute or less for logging that can be performed on a logging schedule.
For this reason, logging interval settings exceeding 1 minute cannot be registered in the logging table.

160 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Screen layout

① Batch No.
Batch number for table management.
The batch name can be edited on the table.
② Batch name
A name can be given to the logging settings registered in the logging table.
The batch name can be edited on the table.
③ Interval
The logging interval of the logging settings registered in the logging table is displayed.
④ Model
Displays the models used in the logging settings registered in the logging table in the "Model name :
Serial number" format.
If multiple models are used, they are separated by commas.
⑤ Channels
Displays the number of items (excluding inter-channel calculation channels) specified in the logging
settings registered in the logging table.
⑥ Remarks
A character string can be set as batch information.
The Remarks column can be edited on the table.

161 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

⑦ [Settings] button
Clicking the [Settings] button allows you to change some of the logging settings registered in the
logging table.
Please refer to the following for detailed information on logging settings.
 Configure the logging settings
 Opening the automatic output settings

* Logging intervals exceeding 1 minute cannot be set.

⑧ [Start] button
Clicking the [Start] button starts normal logging using the logging settings registered in the logging
table.
・ When logging is started, the [Start] button changes to the [Stop] button and the [Settings"] button
becomes inactive.

・ When logging is stopped with the [Stop] button, whether the measurement of the measurement
device is stopped or not depends on the "Instrument stops when logging stops" setting in the
[Logging/Dashboard] tab of the Application Common Settings.
See below for details on the "Instrument stops when logging stops" setting.
 Configure the logging settings
・ When logging is started, logging information is displayed in the logging task.
See below for details on logging settings.
 Display logging tasks

⑨ Toolbar
The following operations can be performed from the toolbar.
The operations available on the toolbar can also be selected in the pop-up menu.

162 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Menu Description

Copy Copies the settings of the selected rows.

Paste Copies the settings of the copied rows to the selected rows.

Clear Clears the settings of the selected rows.

All clear Clears all logging table contents.

Register logging table

Registration to a logging table is performed from the logging settings screen.

Click the "Set Table" button on the logging setup screen to display the logging table registration screen.

When an item is set in the logging table registration screen and the [Set to blank and close] or [Set and close]
button is clicked, the logging settings will be registered in the logging table.

Item Description

Batch No. Specify the batch number to be registered.

The initial value is the lowest number among the table's unregistered numbers.

Batch name Name the logging information to be registered.

Remarks You can enter supplementary information about the logging information to be registered.

Schedule Color The color of logging schedule information displayed on the logging schedule screen can be

Setting specified individually.

If not specified individually, the information will be displayed in the overall color.

163 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

When the "Customize" checkbox is ON, the logging schedule information is displayed in the

color shown in the left frame.

The color can be changed on the color selection screen that opens when the "Select Color" button

is clicked.

Bar Color Set the display color of the logging schedule information

before/while it is running.

Text Color Set the text color of logging schedule information.

Logging Schedule

Select [Settings]-[Logging Schedule] to display the logging schedule screen.

The logging schedule screen allows you to register logging information managed in the logging table on the
schedule to automatically start up to eight logging operations.

* When a logging schedule is executed, logging, dashboard, and remote operation modes cannot be executed.
Similarly, logging schedule cannot be started while logging, dashboard, or remote monitoring mode is being
executed.
* The contents of the logging table can be changed or overwritten after the schedule is registered.
Please be careful when changing the logging table contents registered in the schedule.

Screen layout

164 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

① Schedule registration area

Displays the currently registered schedule status.
・ Logging 1-8 indicates each logging schedule, and each logging schedule is processed in parallel.
・ The area display range can be switched to 1 day, 1 week, or 1 month by changing the display mode.
・ In the case of daily or weekly display, the date and time are displayed in the column headers.
・ The red vertical line on the area indicates the current time.

② Logging schedule information before start/beginning of logging

This indicates the logging schedule information to be executed or the logging schedule information that
is currently being executed.
・ If the string is only halfway through the display, the information is displayed with a tooltip when the
mouse cursor is placed on the string.

③ Logging schedule information after stop

This indicates the logging schedule information after the logging has been stopped.
Logging schedule information that has not been executed and the current time has passed the logging
start time is also displayed in this way.
・ If the string is only halfway through the display, the information is displayed with a tooltip when the
mouse cursor is placed on the string.

④ Operation Controls
This control is used to switch the logging schedule display and to control the display range.
Item Description

Display mode Display Switching Select the schedule display to 1-day, 1-week, or 1-month
display.

165 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

The display period of the 1 month display follows the setting of

the 1 month display period combo box on the right.

Designation of 1 month Set the display period of 1 month.

display period Auto:

Displayed for the number of days in the month from the first

day of the display.

When the display range is changed, the display period is

linked to the first day.

28th/29th/30th/31st :

The display range is fixed to the specified number of days.

Scroll control Reference Date Set the Reference date.

Day display :

The reference date is the display date.

Week/Month display:

The reference date is the display start date.

button Change the reference date to one day earlier.

button Change the reference date to one week earlier.

button Change the reference date to one month earlier.

The amount of change follows the designation of the one-month

display period.

button Change the reference date to one day later.

button Change the reference date to one week later.

button Change the reference date to one month later.

The amount of change follows the designation of the one-month

display period.

button Set the reference date to today's date.

Today's date follows the PC clock.

⑤ [Start]/[Stop] button
Clicking the [Start] button starts the logging schedule.
When the [Stop] button is pressed, the logging schedule is stopped, and all logging in progress at that
time is stopped.
・ When logging is stopped with the [Stop] button, whether the measurement of the measurement
device is stopped or not depends on the "Instrument stops when logging stops" setting in the
[Logging/Dashboard] tab of the Application Common Settings.
See below for details on the "Instrument stops when logging stops" setting.
 Configure the logging settings

⑥ [File] menu

166 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

The following operations can be performed from the [File] menu.

Menu Description

CSV Output The schedule contents can be output in CSV format.

The output file cannot be read and the schedule cannot be reproduced.

The logging schedule is output in the following order: logging schedule No.,

batch No., start time, end time.

Output example :

Designate Holidays for Schedules

You can designate holidays other than Saturday and Sunday for schedule display.

From left: weekdays, Saturdays, Sundays, holidays

How to specify :

Create a "holidays.csv" file in the folder containing the executable file (GENNECTX.exe), enter the dates you wish to

display as holidays, and save the file.

The format is "YYYYY-MM-DD, (comments as necessary)" on a line, and add the number of days as necessary.

Example)

It can be written as or

Register a schedule

In the schedule registration area, left-click on the area where there is no logging schedule information, and
the schedule registration screen will appear.
The schedule registration screen can also be displayed by selecting [Add new] from the pop-up menu.
・ If you set the necessary items and click the [OK] button, the information will be displayed on the schedule
screen as logging schedule information.
・ If the start time is set before the current time, the schedule cannot be registered.

167 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

・ The same instrument cannot be used in multiple schedules at the same time. The same instrument
cannot be used in more than one schedule at the same time.
・ Other logging conditions are the same as normal logging operation.
Please refer to the following for more information.
 Limitations (Logging)

Item Description

Logging No. The logging schedule No. is automatically set from the clicked position.

Period Batch No. Specify the batch No. to be used.

・ The logging information currently registered in the logging

table is displayed as a combo box item as "Batch No. : Batch
name".

Start time *1 Set the time to start logging.

・ The logging preparation state is usually entered 2 minutes

before the start time, and measurement starts at the start

time.

・ If the schedule is started later than 2 minutes before the

start time, logging preparation will begin immediately, and if

measurement can be started after the logging start time,

measurement will begin at that time.

・ If the schedule is started after the start time, logging will not
be performed.

Stop time Set the time to automatically stop logging.

・ The measurement of the instrument will be stopped when

logging is stopped or not according to the "Instrument stops

168 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

when logging stops" setting in the [Logging/Dashboard] tab

of the Common Application Settings.

*1 : For registration within the same logging schedule, the next start time must be at least 3 minutes after the previous

end time.

Change/copy a schedule

Left-click on logging schedule information in the schedule registration area to display the schedule change
screen.
The Change Schedule screen can also be displayed when the [Edit] menu item in the pop-up menu is selected.
The Change Schedule screen allows you to copy the logging schedule.
・ After setting the necessary items, click the "OK" button to change/copy the designated logging schedule
information.
・ If the start time is set before the current time, the schedule cannot be registered.
・ Executed schedules cannot be edited or copied.

To change the schedule, select the upper radio button on the left side of the screen.
Item Description

Logging No. The logging schedule No. is automatically set from the clicked position.

Period Batch No. Specify the batch No. to be used.

・ The logging information currently registered in the logging

table is displayed as a combo box item as "Batch No. : Batch

name".

169 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Start time Set the time to start logging.

・ The same conditions apply as for schedule registration.

Stop time Set the time to automatically stop logging.

・ The measurement of the instrument will be stopped when

logging is stopped or not according to the "Instrument stops

when logging stops" setting in the [Logging/Dashboard] tab

of the Common Application Settings.

To make a schedule copy, select the lower radio button on the left side of the screen.
Item Description

Copy *1 everyday Select the copy method.

everyday (excluding For a multi-day schedule, only weekly can be selected.

Saturdays and Sundays) Everyday :

every week Copy every day of the specified period.

Everyday (excluding Saturday and Sunday) :

Copy every day of the specified period except Saturday and

Sunday.

Weekly :

Copies the schedule to the day of the week specified in the

day of the week combo box.

Day of the week combo box Specify the day of the week to copy if weekly is selected.

When copying a multi-day schedule, the start time will be the

specified day of the week.

Period Set the copying period.

If the copy period is before the current time, the schedule

cannot be copied.

*1 : The copy operation has the following conditions.

The copying period can be specified only after the copy-source time.

The copying period can be specified only after the current time.

The copy period can be specified only after the current time.

Delete a schedule

There are three types of logging schedule information deletion: "Individual schedule deletion", "Logging
schedule batch deletion", and "Logging schedule all deletion".

① Individual schedule deletion

170 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

・ Select the [Delete] from the pop-up menu that appears when logging schedule information is selected, and
the selected logging schedule information can be deleted.

② Logging schedule batch deletion

・ If you right-click on a row header in the schedule registration area and select [Logging X Delete] (X:1-8)
from the pop-up menu, you can delete the logging schedule information in the schedule column displayed
in the menu.

③ Logging schedule all deletion

・ If you right-click on a row header in the schedule registration area and select [Delete All] from the pop-up
menu, you can delete logging schedule information registered in the schedule.

Launch viewer

The results of an executed logging schedule can be viewed in the Logging Viewer.
Select the logging schedule information you wish to view and select [Launch viewer] from the pop-up menu to
start the Logging Viewer.
If the logging results are split into multiple files, the first logging result saved will be displayed.

Logging schedule color settings

The display color of the logging schedule screen can be changed.

・ Select [Scheduler settings] from the pop-up menu, and the "Color of Logging Schedule" screen will appear.
・ Click the [OK] button to apply the color change.

171 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

・ Click the [Selected] button to open the color selection screen.

Item Description

Sheet Set the background color of the schedule registration area.

Back of Sche. Set the display color of the logging schedule information before starting/while running.

・ This color can be specified for each batch, and if set, the batch setting will take precedence.

Finished of Sche. Set the display color of logging schedule information after stopping.

Text of Sche. Set the text color of logging schedule information.

・ This color can be specified for each batch, and if set, the batch setting will take precedence.

Display scheduled tasks

When a logging schedule is started or the [Settings]-[Scheduled Tasks] menu is selected, the Scheduled Tasks
screen will appear.
・ The logging schedule status is displayed on the Scheduled Tasks screen.
・ Double-clicking on the logging information display during logging activates the logging screen during
logging.
・ Double-clicking on the logging information display after logging has stopped will open the corresponding
logging data in the logging viewer.
・ If the logging data is divided and saved in multiple pieces, the first logging data will be opened.

172 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Screen layout

① Logging schedule No.

Logging schedule No. is displayed as "[1]:Logging 1".

② Batch name
Displays the batch name of the batch No. specified in the logging schedule.
When a schedule is not specified, it is displayed blank.

③ Start time
Displays the time when logging was actually started.
When a schedule is not specified, it is displayed blank.

④ End time
While logging is in progress, the scheduled logging end time is displayed.
After logging is finished, the actual time when logging is finished is displayed.

⑤ Logging status icon

The icon is displayed while logging is in progress and after logging has stopped.

The icon is displayed while logging is in progress, the icon is displayed after logging has

stopped, and the icon is displayed when logging is not specified.

173 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

About the Menu

The following menus are available on the scheduled tasks screen

Menu Description

Character size You can select the size of the displayed characters from four types (small,

standard, medium, and large).

The screen size is also changed according to the character size.

Arrangement You can select from four types of display arrangement (one vertical row, two
columns, four columns, or one horizontal row).

174 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Monitor Measured Values (Dashboard Function [LAN])

Overview

•The dashboard function allows you to monitor the status of measurements in an easy-to-understand, visual
manner by placing measured values on a user-specified background image.
•You can set a threshold value for each measurement item and save alarm information on the computer if the
measured value exceeds the threshold range.
※ Monitoring of measured values over a LAN is supported.

① Instrument list/layout list

・ Instrument list: Displays instruments registered in the Map Editor in a tree format.
・ Layout list: Displays previously saved layouts in a tree format.

② Layout area
Using background image and layout items, create the appearance of the monitoring system here.

③ Toolbar
・ Map Editor: Allows you to search for instruments, select channels (measurement items), and
configure advanced instrument settings.
・ List: Toggles display of the instrument and layout list.
・ Monitor Start/Stop: Starts and stops monitoring of measured values.

175 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

・ Monitor List: Displays a list of measured values for the channels (measurement items) being
monitored.
・ Top View: Switches the layout to the [Top View].

Supported Instruments

•The real-time measurement function supports the following instruments.

Model Name Firmware URL

version

PQ3100 *1 POWER QUARITY Ver. 2.10 or

https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6387
ANALYZER later
PQ3198 *1,*3 POWER QUARITY Ver. 1.10 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6503
ANALYZER later
PW3335 *2,*4,*6 POWER METER Ver. 1.11 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/single-
later phase-ac-dc/id_5831
PW3336 *2,*4,*6 POWER METER Ver. 1.23 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-
later meters/3phase-ac-dc/id_5805
PW3337 *2,*4,*6 POWER METER Ver. 1.23 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-
later meters/3phase-ac-dc/id_5929
PW3360 *1 CLAMP ON POWER Ver. 3.10 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5589
LOGGER later
PW3365 *1 CLAMP ON POWER Ver. 2.00 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5565
LOGGER later
PW3390 *2 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 2.00 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6413
later
PW6001 *2 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 3.02 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5796
later
PW8001 *2,*4,*5,*7 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/power-
later analyzer/id_412384
LR8400, LR8401, LR8402 MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 1.21 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5613
*1 later
LR8410 *1 WIRELESS LOGGING Ver. 1.42 or
https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=911
STATION later
LR8450, LR8450-01 *1,*8 MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 1.20 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6535
later
MR6000 *1 MEMORY HiCORDER Ver. 2.12 or
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6439
later
BT5525 *1 BATTERY V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/electrical-safety-
INSULATION Later testers/insulation/id_1265405
TESTER
ST5680 *1 DC HIPOT TESTER V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/electrical-safety-
Later testers/hipot/id_1265574
IM3523A *1 LCR METER V1.02 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/lcr-meters/10-
Later mhz/id_1265475
RM3545A*1 RESISTANCE METER V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/resistance-
Later meters/resistance/id_1266279
（The RM3545A does not support measurement time longer
than 1 minute, so reduce the measurement SPEED,
AVERAGE, DELAY, OVC, and number of channels so that
the measurement time is less than 1 minute.）

*1. If the measurement of instrument is stop state when the measurement is started by this function, it will shift to the start state.
*2. If the measurement of instrument is stop state when the measurement is started by this function, it will shift to the start state.
*3. All of the analysis data of the measurement instrument is reset by starting the measurement with this feature. It is recommended
to use this feature after the recording and analysis of the measurement data has been completed (Data reset state).
*4. All of the integrated data of the measurement instrument is reset by starting the measurement with this feature. It is
recommended to use this feature after the recording and analysis of the integration data has been completed (Data reset state).
*5. If the setting of integration by each wiring is enabled on the instrument when measurement is started using this function, the
setting is changed to integration by all wires.
*6 If the version of this application is less than V5.10, acquisition of harmonic items is not supported. Please upgrade this application
to V5.10 or later.
*7 Do not use "," or ";" as a unit when setting the user-defined function (UDF) of the main unit.
*8 Do not use "," or ";" as a unit when setting the waveform calculation and scaling functions of the main unit.

176 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Limitations

Limitations on real-time measurement (logging/monitoring)

Item Limitation Remarks

Maximum number of channels 512 + 16 (inter-channel calculation channels)

Maximum number of 30

connected instruments

Communications interface LAN

Monitor interval 1/2/5/10/30 sec. The minimum logging interval is determined by

1/2/5/10/30 min. measuring the time required for the application to

1 hr. acquire measured values.

Limitations on communications
Item Limitation Remarks

Interface LAN

Network range for automatic _._._.2 to _._._.254

search *Automatic search is limited to the same

network range as the computer.

DHCP Not supported

Logging interval 1/2/5/10/30 sec. *Only when monitor value saving (logging) is

1/2/5/10/30 min. enabled

1 hr. *Logging interval is linked to monitor interval.

Maximum number of inter- 16 (Z1 to Z16)

channel calculation channels

Data segmentation 1 day/1 hr. *Only when monitor value saving (logging) is

enabled

Automatic output (daily 1 day *Only when monitor value saving (logging) is

report) save interval enabled

When logging is enabled:

→ Automatically generated daily at 23 hr. 59

min. 59 sec.

When logging stopped:

→ Automatically generated when logging stops

Automatic output (CSV) save 1 day/1 hr. *Only when monitor value saving (logging) is

interval *As determined by data segmentation setting enabled

When logging is enabled:

→ 1 day: Automatically generated daily at 23 hr.

59 min. 59 sec.

→ 1 hr.: Automatically generated daily at XX hr.

59 min. 59 sec.

177 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

When logging stopped:

→ Automatically generated when logging stops

Automatic output (daily Excel *Only when monitor value saving (logging) is

report) format enabled

Workflow

Start and stop the measured value monitor as described below.

Connect the instrument(s) to the computer with a LAN cable (p.17)

Launch the dashboard (p.179)

Launch the Map Editor (instrument selection) (p.179)

Search for instruments (p.180)

Select channels (p.181)

Configure advanced instrument settings (p.184)

Exit the Map Editor (instrument selection) (p.186)

Create an instrument layout (p.188)

Start or stop the measured value monitor (p.213)

178 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Launch the Dashboard

Launch the Dashboard

1. Click the [Function] tab and then click [Dashboard].

2. The [Dashboard] screen will be displayed.

Launch the Map Editor (instrument selection)

To monitor measured values, you must first choose which instruments and measurement items to monitor.
This task is accomplished by launching [Map Editor (Instrument Selection)] under the [Dashboard
Function].
The Map Editor (instrument selection) provides the following functionality:

•Searching for instruments (p.180)

•Choosing channels (p.181)
•Configuring advanced instrument settings (p.184)

179 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Launch the Map Editor (Instrument Selection)

1. Click the [Map Editor] button.

2. The [Map Editor (Instrument Selection)] screen will be displayed.

Search for Instruments

This section describes how to search for instruments whose measured values you wish to monitor.
To use this function, you must have connected one or more instruments to the computer with LAN cables.
For more information about how to connect instrument to the computer with LAN cables, see “To
communicate with instruments by LAN cable” (p.17).

1. The application will start searching for instruments when you open the [Map Editor (Instrument
Selection)] screen.
You can search again for instruments after launching the [Map Editor (Instrument Selection)] screen by
clicking the [Update] button.
The application will display a [Searching instruments] message while searching for instruments that are
connected to the computer via the LAN.

180 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. A list of instruments found by the search will be displayed.

Select Channels(Setting Calculation Channels)

This section describes how to select the measurement items (measurement channels) whose measured
values you wish to monitor.
To use this function, you must have connected one or more instruments to the computer with LAN cables.
For more information about how to connect instrument to the computer with LAN cables, see “To
communicate with instruments by LAN cable” (p.17).

1. Select the instruments whose measurement items (measurement channels) you wish to measure from the
list.

2. Click the [Select Channels] button.

181 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. The [Channel Selection] screen will be displayed.

A [Collecting measurement channels] message will be displayed.

4. A list of enabled measurement channels for the instruments selected on the [Map Editor (Instrument
Selection)] screen will be displayed.

*You can search again for measurement channels by clicking the button.
* In PQ3100,PQ3198,PW3360,PW3365,PW3335*,PW3336*,PW3337*,PW8001 (with harmonics analysis only), you
can select the harmonics measurement channels by selecting the drop down list of measurement items.

182 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*If the version of this application is less than V5.10, the acquisition of harmonic items for PW3335,
PW3336, and PW3337 is not supported. Please upgrade this application to V5.10 or later.

* Measurement items of some instruments, such as PW3336, PW8001,PQ3198 are displayed with an
identification name (e.g. PWP, Mupk). Please refer to the following for the correspondence between the
identification name and the measurement item name.
 Identification name and measurement item name in Logging and Dashboard function
* If the number of measurement parameters for normal items exceeds 1200, the page will be divided into
multiple pages. In such a case, select the page to be displayed in the combobox and switch pages.

5. Select the checkboxes for the measurement channels you wish to monitor.
Click the [OK] button to exit the channel selection process.

*You can select up to 512 channels.

*You can refine the measurement channels shown in the list using the search box at the top of the
window.
*You can limit the measurement channels shown in the list to those channels that are already been

selected by clicking the button.

*You can select or deselect all channels by clicking the button.

6. To use selected measurement channels to perform an inter-channel calculation, select the [User inter-channel
calculation] checkbox and click the [Enter Formula] button.

183 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

7. To use selected measurement channels to perform an inter-channel calculation, set the formula on the [Formula

Settings] dialog box.

See below for more information about the [Formula Settings] dialog box.

 Configuring detailed settings for inter-channel calculations

Configure Advanced Instrument Settings

The following tasks can be accomplished on the advanced instrument settings screen:
•Editing instrument comments
•Editing measurement item comments
•Configuring measurement item thresholds
Before using this functionality, you must have searched for instruments and selected measurement
channels.

184 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Click the [Advanced] button.

2. A screen allowing you to configure advanced instrument settings will be displayed.

3. Edit the instrument model and measurement item comments and configure threshold settings for
measurement items.

185 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. Exit the advanced instrument settings screen by clicking the [OK] button.

Model comment Displays the name used to identify the instrument. Enter an easy-to-
understand comment.
Measurement item Displays the name used to identify the measurement item. Enter an easy-to-
comment understand comment.

Exit the Map Editor (instrument selection)

1. Click the [Save] button to save the changes made in the [Map Editor (Instrument Selection)] screen, or
click the [Close] button to discard the changes.

*In V5.30 and earlier, when you click the [Close] button, you will get the message [Changes have not been
saved. Save and exit?] will be displayed. In this case,
・Click [Yes] to save any changes you made to the Map Editor and exit.

186 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

・Click [No] to discard any changes you made to the Map Editor and exit.

2. The [Map Editor (Instrument Selection)] screen will close, and any instruments registered in the Map
Editor will be shown in the [Instrument List] tree.

187 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Create an Instrument Layout (Basic Instructions)

This section describes how to create a layout as a way to display the status of measurement in an easy-to-
understand, visual manner.
These basic instructions describe how to create a layout for monitoring measured values easily using the
Monitor Window.
To create a measured value layout, you must first select instruments and measurement channels as
described in “Launch the Map Editor (Instrument Selection)” (p.179 to 186).

1. Select the instrument whose measured values you wish to monitor in the [Instrument List].
2. Select [Open Monitor] on the context menu displayed when you right-click the mouse.

3. The [Monitor Window] will be displayed in the layout area on the right.

4. Drag the [Monitor Window] with the left mouse button and position it in the desired location.

5. Repeat steps 1. through 4. for all instruments.

188 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Created an Instrument Layout (Advanced Instructions)

This section describes how to create a layout as a way to display the status of measurement in an easy-to-
understand, visual manner.
These advanced instructions describe how to create an even more visually pleasing layout.
To create a measured value layout, you must first select instruments and measurement channels as
described in “Launch the Map Editor (Instrument Selection)” (p.179 to p.186).

Layout overview

Using layout items, you can create a layout screen depicting the monitoring system as shown in the figure
below.

User-created background image

189 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Workflow

1. Determine the screen size (p.190)

2. Paste in a background image (p.191)

3. Position layout items (p.192)

4. Lock a layout (p.199)

5. Save the layout (p.199)

Delete a layout (p.200)

Move a layout (p.201)

Layout context menu (p.202)

Layout item context menu (p.202)

Determine the Screen Size (for Full Screen)

This section describes how to determine the layout screen size.

If you plan to display the entire layout screen, display the entire screen and then display the screen size.

1. Display the entire layout (full screen).

1-1. Right-click the layout and select [Display Entire Screen].

1-2. The layout will be displayed so that it fills the screen.

Note: To return to the original size, select [Display Entire Screen] again or press the ESC key.

190 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. Display the screen size.

2-1. Right-click the layout and select [Display Tool Window].

2-2. The [Tool Window] will be displayed. Select the [Screen Display] tab.

2-3. The [Window Width] and [Layout screen height] indicate the layout screen size (unit: px).

Paste in a Background Image

This section describes how to register a background image by setting the position and size of the created
image.

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[Image].

2. Select the image file you wish to paste and click [Open].
3. Using the mouse, change the position and size of the image.
You can change the size of the image while maintaining its aspect ratio by dragging the corner of the
image with the mouse.
3. Once you have positioned the image as desired, right-click the image.

191 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Select [Register as Background Image] to register the image as the background image.

*For more information about the image context menu, see p.212.

Position Layout Items

This section describes how to position layout items on a background image.

Position layout items (comments)

This section describes how to display comments on the layout.

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[Comment].

2. Enter a comment and click [OK].

4. Using the mouse, position the comment as desired.

192 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*For more information about the comment context menu, see p.202.

Position layout items (monitor windows)

This section describes how to place a [Monitor Window] in the layout.

Note: The following applies to monitor windows and measured value labels.
Item type Border Display unit Displayed parameter
Monitor windows Yes Instrument Measurement item selected in [Channel Selection]
Measured value label None Measurement Measurement item selected in [Channel Selection]
item

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[Monitor Window].

2. A window for adding a monitor window will be displayed. You can select any instrument included in the
instrument list.

193 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Using the mouse, position the monitor window as desired.

*For more information about the monitor window context menu, see p.203.

Position layout items (measured value labels)

This section describes how to place a borderless [Measured Value Label] in a layout.
Note: The following applies to monitor windows and measured value labels.
Item type Border Display unit Displayed parameter
Monitor windows Yes Instrument Measurement item selected in [Channel Selection]
Measured value label None Measurement Measurement item selected in [Channel Selection]
item

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[Measured Value Label].

2. A window for adding a measured value label will be displayed. You can select any measurement item
included in the instrument list as long as it has also been selected in [Channel Selection]. Specify the
measurement item to display and click [OK].

194 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Using the mouse, position the measured value label as desired.

*For more information about the measured value label context menu, see p.203.

Position layout items (measured value graphics)

This section describes how to place a [Measured Value Graphic] in a layout.

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[Measured Value Graphic].

2. A window for adding a measured value graphic will be displayed. You can select any measurement item
included in the instrument list as long as it has also been selected in [Channel Selection]. Specify the
measurement item to display and click [Settings].

195 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Using the mouse, change the position and size of the measured value graphic as desired.

*For more information about the measured value graphic context menu, see p.204.

Position layout items (on/off displays)

This section describes how to place an [On/Off Display] in the layout.

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[On/Off Display].

2. A window for adding an on/off display will be displayed. You can select any measurement item included in
the instrument list as long as it has also been selected in [Channel Selection]. Specify the measurement item
to display and click [Settings].

196 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Using the mouse, position the on/off display as desired.

*For more information about the on/off display context menu, see p.205.

Position layout items (graph)

This section describes how to place an [graph] in the layout.

* The graph display automatically scrolls from right to left, and graph values that disappear from the display
cannot be viewed later.

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[graph].

2. A window for adding a graph window will be displayed.

3. Using the mouse, position the graph window as desired.

197 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*For more information about the graph context menu, see p.206.

Position layout items (images)

This section describes how to place an [Image] in the layout.

4. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[Image].

5. Click the image file you wish to paste and click [Open].

6. Using the mouse, change the position and size of the image as desired.

*For more information about the image context menu, see p.212.

Position layout items (layout link buttons)

This section describes how to place a [Button Linking to Layout] in a layout so that you can switch among
multiple screens for monitoring purposes.
Note: If you’re only using a one-screen layout, there is no need to use layout link buttons.

1. Right-click the layout and select [Add Layout Item]-[Button Linking to Layout].

2. A window for adding a layout link button will be displayed. Specify the link destination and click [OK].

3. Using the mouse, position the layout link button as desired.

198 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

You can move to the link destination by clicking the layout link button.

*For more information about the layout link button context menu, see p.212.

Lock a Layout

This section describes how to lock the layout screen and disable editing of all layout items.

1. Right-click the layout and select [Screen Editing]-[Prohibit All].

2. Editing of all layout items in the layout will be prohibited.

Save a Layout

This section describes how to save a layout once you’ve finished populating it with layout items.
Note: Always save a layout after making changes.

199 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. Right-click the layout and select [Save Layout]-[Save As…].

6. When the save screen is displayed, enter the [Current filename].

If you wish to use a shortcut key to switch among layouts, set the desired key (F1 to F7).

7. Click the [Save] button.

Once you save a layout, it will appear in the [Layout List].

Delete a Layout

This section describes how to delete a previously created layout.

200 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

8. In the layout list, right-click the layout you wish to delete and select [Delete].

9. The layout and all layout items it contains will be deleted.

Switch to a Layout

This section describes how to switch among layouts.

Method 1 Double-click the layout you wish to view in the Layout List.

Method 2 Right-click the layout you wish to view in the Layout List and select [Go].
Method 3 Click a [Button Linking to a Layout] that has been placed in a layout*1.
Method 4 Press a shortcut key that has been assigned to a layout (F1 to F7)*2.

*1 For more information about how to configure layout link buttons, see p.198
*2 For more information about how to assign shortcut keys, see p.199.

Note: Switching to the top view

The [Top View] in the Layout List is a special layout. You can display a button for switching to the top
view in the toolbar. You can switch to the top view by clicking the top view button.
How to display the top view button
Select the [Display top view button] checkbox underneath the layout list.

201 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Layout Context Menu

The layout context menu offers the following commands:

Context menu command Description

Save Layout Save Save the layout by overwriting the current layout.

Save As Save the current layout under a new name. (p.199)

Display Entire Screen Display the layout so that it fills the screen (full screen). (p.190)

Screen Editing Enable or disable movement of all monitor windows and editing of all layout items.

Change Background Image Paste a background image into the layout. (p.191)

Background color Set the background color.

Add Layout Item Add a layout item. (p.192)

Amount of Grid Movement for Layout Items •Set the amount of movement for items in the layout.

•You can align layout items by setting the amount of grid movement.

Display Instrument Explorer Display the Instrument Explorer. (p.201)

Display Tool Window •Display the screen size. (p.190)

•Configure operation of on/off displays. (p.228)

Clear Layout Clear Background Image Clear the layout’s background image.

Clear Monitors/Layout Clear all monitor windows and layout items.

Items

Clear All Clear the layout.

Clear All Layout Item Clear all settings of displayed measurement items in the [measured value labels],

Displayed Measurement [measured value graphics], and [on/off displays] parts among the layout items.

Item Settings

Layout Item Context Menus

Layout item (comment) context menu

The layout item (comment) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Change Comment Change the comment.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of the comment.

Text Display Position Set the text display position.

Automatic Size Adjustment Automatically adjust the size.

Font Change the comment’s font.

Text Color Change the comment’s text color.

Background Color Change the comment’s background color.

202 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Copy Layout Items Create a copy of the comment.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied comment (comment contents, text

display position, size, font, text color, and background color).

Close Close the comment.

Layout item (monitor window) context menu

The layout item (monitor window) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Change Displayed Measurement Items Change the measurement items shown in the monitor window.

Screen Size Select the screen size.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of monitor window.

Measured Value Color Change the monitor value’s text color.

Background Color Change the monitor window’s background color.

Display Digit Number Settings Sets the auxiliary unit and the number of display digits (automatic, customized) for

the measurement

Copy Monitor Create a copy of the monitor window.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied monitor window (displayed

parameters, screen size, measured value color, and background color).

Close Close the monitor window.

Layout item (measured value label) context menu

The layout item (measured value label) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Display Units Set whether to display the measurement units.

Change Displayed Measurement Item Change the measurement item to display.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of the measured value label.

Text Display Position Set the text display position.

Automatic Size Adjustment Automatically adjust the size.

Font Change the measured value label’s font.

Measured Value Color Change the measured value label’s text color.

Background Color Change the measured value label’s background color.

Display Digit Number Settings Sets the auxiliary unit and number of display digits (automatic, customized) for

measured values.

Copy Layout Items Create a copy of the measured value label.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied measured value label (unit display

status, displayed parameter, instrument settings, text display position, size, font,

measured value color, and background color).

203 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Close Close the measured value label.

Layout item (measured value graphic) context menu

The layout item (measured value graphic) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Graphic Settings(*1) Set the display range, upper and lower limit value display, and scale display.

Change Displayed Measurement Item Change the measurement item displayed.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of the measured value graphic.

Display Digit Number Settings Sets the auxiliary unit and number of display digits (automatic, customized) for

measured values.

Copy Layout Items Create a copy of the measured value graphic.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied measured value graphic (graphic

settings, displayed parameter, and instrument settings).

Close Close the measured value graphic.

*1: About graphic settings

1. Right-click the measured value graphic and select [Graphic Settings].

204 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. The [Graphic Settings] screen will be displayed.

① Allows you to set the maximum and minimum values for the display range.
② Displays the upper and lower limit value settings. (The upper and lower limit value settings can be
changed on the instrument advanced settings screen [p.184].)
③ Allows you to set the graphic bar’s orientation, color, and size.
④ Allows you to set whether to display the upper and lower limit values.
⑤ Allows you to set the scale display.
⑥ Click the [Update] button to update the measured value graphic display.

Layout item (on/off display) context menu

The layout item (on/off display) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Configure On/Off Display Define the on/off state and configure settings such as on/off images and colors.

Change Displayed Measurement Item Change the measurement items shown.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of the on/off display.

Automatic Size Adjustment Automatically adjust the size.

Display Digit Number Settings Sets the auxiliary unit and number of display digits (automatic, customized) for

measured values.

Copy Layout Items Create a copy of the on/off display.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied on/off display (image settings,

displayed parameters, and instrument settings).

Close Close the on/off display.

205 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*1 About on/off display settings

1. Right-click the on-off display and select [Configure On/Off Display].

2. The [On/Off Display Settings] screen will be displayed.

Define the on/off state and configure settings such as on/off colors and images and the border style.

*The [Register multiple on images] checkbox (outlined in blue below) will only be displayed if the on/off
display has been set up with multiple measurement items. To set up an on/off display with multiple
measurement items, use the Instrument Explorer (p.224).
*Selecting the [Register multiple on images] checkbox will cause the window to be expanded so that you
can set an “on” image file for each measurement item.

Layout item (graph) context menu

The layout item (graph) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Configure graph setting Configure various settings for the graph display.

Vertical axis setting Selects one of the displayed graph items as the basis for the vertical axis.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of the on/off display.

Copy Layout Items Create a copy of the graph display.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied graph display.

Close Close the graph display.

206 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*1 About graph display settings

1. Right-click the graph display and select [Graph settings].

2. The [Graph settings] screen will be displayed.

The [Overall] tab is used to configure the display settings for the overall graph.

Settings Description

Graph area Width Sets the width of the graph display area.

If a vertical axis is displayed, the width of the graph area will be larger than the

specified value.

The width can also be changed directly by mouse operation.

Height Sets the height of the graph display area.

If the horizontal axis is displayed, the height of the graph area will be larger than

the specified value.

The height can also be changed directly by mouse operation.

[Graph Background Sets the graph background color.

Color] button Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

Update interval Interval (*1) The graph update interval can be specified.

If Auto, the graph display is updated at the same interval as the monitoring

interval.

If 1min to 1hour is specified, the representative value of the update interval is used

as the graph display value.

The representative value is set in "Graph Setting"-"Displayed Values" in the [Graph

1]-[Graph 8] tab.

207 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Display Plot spacing Sets the plot spacing of the graph in pixels.

The larger the value, the wider the plot spacing.

* 1 means plotting with no spacing, 2 means plotting with 1 pixel spacing.

Display vertical axis On: The vertical axis is displayed on the left side of the graph display area.

Off: The vertical axis is not displayed.

Display unit On: Displays the unit of measure for the selected item at the top of the vertical axis

display.

Off: The unit is not displayed.

Effective when the vertical axis display is on.

Display right frame On: Display the right frame of the graph.

Off: The right frame of the graph is not displayed.

Effective when vertical axis display is on.

Display horizontal On: The horizontal axis is displayed at the bottom of the graph display area.

axis Off: The horizontal axis is not displayed.

Display selected item On: Displays the name of the selected item at the top of the graph.

name Off: The name of the selected item is not displayed.

Highlight the selected On: The graph line of the item on which the vertical axis is based is displayed 2

item pixels thicker than the specified value.

Off: The graph line of the item on which the vertical axis is based is not highlighted.

[Axis background Sets the background color of the vertical axis, horizontal axis, and the area around

color] button the graph display area.

Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

Horizontal axis Format Scale labels can be selected for the horizontal axis.

setting The display interval of labels is determined automatically.

Time: Labels are displayed in time format (hh:mm:ss).

Date: Labels are displayed in date/time format (yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm:ss).

Point: Labels are displayed in the order of measurement data (from 1).

Scale only: Displays only the scale without labels.

Scale Specifies numerical values for the scale interval.

Auxiliary scale Specifies numerical values for the auxiliary scale interval.

Display grid On: Vertical grid lines are displayed along the scale in the graph display area.

Off: Vertical grid lines are not displayed in the graph display area.

[Scale Color] button Sets the color of the horizontal axis scale label.

Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

[Grid Color] button Sets the color of the vertical grid lines.

Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

Exactly on time (*1) On: Plots a graph from the delimited time. (*2)

Off: Plots a graph from the monitor start time.

Graph Type Line Graph Displays all graphs as line graphs.

208 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Bar Graph Displays items in Graph 1 as a bar graph, and line graphs for all items except

Graph 1.

[Add Graph] button (*1) Add a graph item.

Clicking the button displays the [Layout-Measurement item settings] dialog box.

Select the measurement item you wish to display and press the [OK] button to add

the [Graph x] (x:1-8) tab to the Graph Settings screen.

[Update] button Clicking the [Update] button will apply the changed settings to the graph display.

Changes made to all tabs are reflected in the graph display.

[OK] button When you press the button, the changed settings will be reflected in the graph

display and the graph setting screen will close.

[Cancel] button Press the button to close the graph setting screen.

Changes made after pressing the [Update] button will not be reflected in the graph

display.

*1: Cannot be operated when the monitor is running.

*2: About the “Exactly on time“
The dashboard monitor start time is subject to the following conditions:
・When the monitor interval is less than 1 minute:
The monitor starts at the timing when 00 seconds in seconds is measured.
Example: If the monitor interval is 5 sec, the monitor starts at the timing of 00 sec, 05 sec, 10 sec, ..., 50 sec,
and 55 sec.
・When the monitoring interval is 1 minute or longer:
The monitoring starts at the timing when 00 seconds is measured.
For this reason, the "Exactly on time" setting is ignored if the monitor interval is specified to be 2 minutes or
longer and monitoring is started because the timing of 00 minutes in minutes may not be measured due to the
specification when the monitor interval is 2 minutes or longer.
Example: If monitoring is started at 08:00:30 with a monitoring interval of 2 minutes, monitor values are
obtained as follows: 08:01:00, 08:03:00, ... , 08:59:00, 09:01:00, ... and therefore graphs cannot
be drawn based on 9:00:00.

The [Graph x] (x:1-8) tab is used to set the display settings for each graph item.

209 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Settings Description

Select this item Set the item to be used as the basis for the vertical axis.

One item is always selected.

This can also be set in the [Vertical Axis Setting] menu of the right-click menu.

On: This item is used as the basis for the vertical axis. When this item is turned on,

the other items that were used as the basis for the vertical axis are turned off.

Off: Indicates that this item is not the basis for the vertical axis. If you want to turn

it off, please turn on other items.

[Delete] button (*1) Deletes the item on the displayed tab from the graph display.

If the deleted item was the basis for the vertical axis, Graph 1 is designated as the

basis.

If all items are deleted, the display returns to the initial view.

Item name Displays the name of the selected measurement item.

The measurement item cannot be changed on this screen.

Display range setting Maximum Sets the maximum value of the vertical axis display range.

Minimum Sets the minimum value for the vertical axis display range.

Upper limit The upper limit setting is displayed.

To change the upper limit setting, go to the instrument advanced settings screen

(p.184).

Lower limit The lower limit setting is displayed.

To change the lower limit setting, go to the instrument advanced settings screen

(p.184).

Unit prefix Specify the auxiliary units used in the graph display.

Number of decimal Specify the number of decimal places for numerical values used in the graph

places display.

Vertical axis setting Display grid On: Horizontal grid lines are displayed along the scale in the graph display area.

(*2) Off: Horizontal grid lines are not displayed in the graph display area.

210 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Number of scale Specifies numerically the number of scale divisions on the vertical axis.

divisions (Range: 1 to 99)

* When 1 is specified, no scale is set between the maximum and minimum values.

Number of divisions Specifies numerically the number of auxiliary scale divisions on the vertical axis.

of auxiliary scale (Range: 1 to 99)

When 1 is specified, no auxiliary scale is provided between the scales.

[Scale color] button Sets the color of the vertical axis scale labels.

Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

[Grid color] button Sets the color of the horizontal grid lines.

Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

Upper/Lower limit Display On: Upper and lower limit lines are displayed in the graph display area.

value settings Off: Upper and lower limit lines are not displayed in the graph display area.

[Line color] button Sets the color of the upper and lower limit lines.

Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

Graph settings Display value Specify the graph representative value.

(*1) (*3) Instantaneous: The graph value is the instantaneous value acquired during the

update interval.

Average: The graph value is the average of the instantaneous values acquired

during the update interval.

Maximum: The maximum value of the instantaneous values acquired during the

update interval is used as the graph value.

Minimum: The minimum value of the instantaneous values acquired during the

update interval is the graph value.

* If the update interval is automatic or the update interval is the same as (or

shorter than) the monitoring interval, the graph representative value is the

instantaneous value.

Line thickness Specifies the numerical thickness of the graph line. (Range: 1 to 99)

This setting is common for line graphs and bar graphs.

Line type You can select the line type for the graph from the following options.

Solid, Dashed, Dotted, Single-dash, Double-dash

Marker type You can select a marker type for a line graph from the following options.

None, Circle, Square, Triangle

Marker size Specifies the numerical size of the markers on a line graph. (Range: 1 to 99)

If it is the same as (or smaller than) the line thickness, the marker will not be

displayed.

[Line color] button Sets the colors of graph lines and markers.

Clicking the button displays the [Color] dialog box.

Please refer to the [General Settings] tab description for the [Add Graph], [Update], [OK], and [Cancel] button actions.

*1: Cannot be operated when the monitor is running.

211 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

*2: The units and number of decimal places used for the vertical axis of a graph display are not linked to the setting
of the number of digits displayed in the monitor window, etc.
*3: Even if the display value settings are changed after the monitor is executed, the graph will display the data as it
was at the time the monitor was executed.
The graph will be cleared the next time the monitor is started.

Layout item (image) context menu

The layout item (image) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Change Image Load an image.

Register as Background Image Register an image as a background image.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of the image.

Automatic Size Adjustment Revert to the size of the image at the time it was loaded.

Copy Layout Items Create a copy of the image.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied image (image and size).

Close Close the image.

Layout item (layout link button) context menu

The layout item (layout link button) context menu offers the following commands:
Context menu command Description

Change Link Destination Change the link destination of the layout link button.

Change Text Change the text of the layout link button.

Screen Editing Enable or disable editing of the layout link button.

Text Display Position Set the text display position.

Automatic Size Adjustment Automatically adjust the size of the layout link button.

Font Change the font used for the text of the layout link button.

Text Color Change the text color of the layout link button.

Background Color Change the background color of the layout link button.

Copy Layout Items Create a copy of the layout link button.

*The copy will inherit the attributes of the copied button (link destination, text

display position, size, font, text color, and background color).

Close Close the layout link button.

212 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Start or Stop the Measured Value Monitor

This section describes how to start and stop the measured value monitor.

Start the measured value monitor

Verify that the tasks listed below have been completed before starting the measured value monitor.
If any tasks remain incomplete, complete them as described in “Workflow” (p.178).

•The instrument has been connected to the PC with a LAN cable.

•A list of instruments is displayed on the [Map Editor (Instrument Selection)] screen.
•The instrument connection status is either “Connected” (shown in green) or “Found” (shown in light green).
•One or more measurement channels have been selected under [Channel Selection] on the [Map Editor
(Instrument Selection)] screen.
•One or more layout items (monitor window, measured value label, etc.) have been placed in the layout.

1. Click the [Start Monitoring] button on the toolbar.

2. The [Start Monitoring] screen will be displayed.

After the [Start Monitoring] screen is displayed, the following message may be displayed: [Calculating
how long it will take to acquire measured values…]. The application will automatically calculate the
minimum monitor interval while the message is being displayed.

213 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. Select the desired monitor interval from the [Monitor interval] drop-down list on the [Start Monitoring]
screen.

4. Configure settings related to monitor value saving (logging), data segmentation, and daily report
and .CSV automatic output under [Logging settings].

Settings Description

Logging Save monitor values (on/off) On:

settings Save (logs) monitor values. Recorded measurement data will be saved

in the data list in the logging format.

Off:

Do not save monitor values. When the measured values in layout

elements are updated, only alarm information will be updated.

Data division 1 day: Segment and save logging data in 1-day blocks.

1 hr.: Segment and save logging data in 1-hour blocks.

Automatic Output Daily/Weekly/ On: Automatically output the selected reports.

output report Monthly Off: Do not automatically output the selected reports.

settings Data save Specifies where to save the reports.

destination GENNECT One:

·Save the reports in the GENNECT One data list.

214 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Folder:

·Save the reports in a user-selected directory. Click the [...] button to

select the directory in which to save the reports.

Detailed Configures detailed settings related to automatic output of the

settings reports.

See below for more information about the settings.

 Configuring detailed settings for automatic output

(daily/weekly/monthly reports)
Output CSV On/off On: Automatically output CSV files based on the logging data

segmentation time (1 day/1 hr.).

Off: Do not automatically output CSV files based on the logging data

segmentation time (1 day/1 hr.).

Folder ·CSV files are saved in a user-selected directory. Click the [...] button

to select the directory in which to save daily reports.

Detailed Configures detailed settings related to automatic output of CSV files.

settings See below for more information about the settings.

 Configuring detailed settings for automatic output (CSV)

CSV output of graph display On/Off On: Graph values are automatically output to a CSV file.

results Off: Graph values are not output.

Folder ·CSV files are saved in a user-selected directory. Click the [...] button

to select the directory in which to save daily reports.

Detailed Configures detailed settings related to automatic output of CSV files.

settings See below for more information about the settings.

 Configuring detailed settings for automatic output (CSV)

215 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. Click the [Start Monitoring] button on the [Start Monitoring] screen.

6. Monitoring of measured values will start.

•Once monitoring starts, the layout items (monitor windows, measured value labels, etc.) will be
updated.
•You can display the [Monitor List] screen by clicking [Monitor List] on the toolbar. The [Monitor List]
screen displays a list of measurement items and monitor values.

216 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Stop the Measured Value Monitor

1. Click the [Stop Monitoring] button on the toolbar.

2. Monitoring of measured values will stop.

217 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Manage Instrument Lists

Instrument lists group together information about instruments, measurement items, layouts, and alarm
settings.
Although it is possible to create multiple instrument lists, by default there is a single instrument list with the
name “Standard.”
You can create new lists, create new lists by copying existing lists, delete lists, switch lists, back up lists, and
restore lists. This section describes each of these operations.

Create a New Instrument List

This section describes how to create a new instrument list.

1. Select [Edit Instrument List]-[Create New Instrument List] in the [File] menu.

2. When the [Create New Instrument List] screen is displayed, enter a name for the instrument list and
click the [OK] button.

3. The new instrument list will be created.

Create a New Instrument List by Copying

This section describes how to create a new instrument list by copying an existing instrument list.

218 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Select [Edit Instrument List]-[Create New Instrument List by Copying] in the [File] menu and select the
name of the instrument list you wish to copy.

2. The [Create New Instrument List by Copying] screen will be displayed. Click [Yes].

3. When the [Create New Instrument List by Copying] screen is displayed, enter a name for the instrument
list and click the [OK] button.

4. The new instrument list will be created.

Rename an Instrument List

This section describes how to rename the currently selected instrument list.

219 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Select [Edit Instrument List]-[Change Instrument List Name] in the [File] menu.

2. When the [Change Instrument List Name] screen is displayed, enter a name for the instrument list and
click the [OK] button.

3. The instrument list’s name will be changed

Switch Instrument Lists

This section describes how to switch instrument lists.

1. Select [Switch Instrument List] in the [File] menu and select the name of the instrument list you wish to
activate.

2. The application will switch to the selected instrument list.

220 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Delete an Instrument List

This section describes how to delete an instrument list.

1. Select [Edit Instrument List]-[Delete Instrument List] in the [File] menu and select the instrument list
you wish to delete.

*You cannot select the currently selected instrument list. If you wish to delete the currently selected
instrument list, switch to a different instrument list and then delete the desired instrument list.

2. The [Collecting measurement channels] message will be displayed.

To delete the list, click [Yes].

Back Up an Instrument List

This section describes how to back up an instrument list.

221 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Select [Edit Instrument List]-[Back Up Instrument List] in the [File] menu.

2. When the [Instrument List Backup] screen is displayed, specify the save destination folder.

3. Select which instrument list(s) to back up under [Backup method] and click the [OK] button.

4. The instrument list(s) will be backed up in a file.

*A backup folder named “DASHBOARD_BACKUP” will be created in the specified save destination
folder.

Restore an Instrument List

This section describes how to restore an instrument list from a file.

1. Select [Edit Instrument List]-[Restore Instrument List] in the [File] menu.

222 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. When the [Instrument List Restore] screen is displayed, specify the folder in which the backup was
saved.

*Specify the backup folder named “DASHBOARD_BACKUP.”

3. Select which instrument list(s) to restore under [Restoration method] and click the [OK] button.

4. The instrument list(s) will be restored from the file.

223 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Other Functionality

Use the Instrument Explorer to Apply Settings to Layout Items

10. This section describes how to use previously registered instrument settings to easily set measurement
items for layout items.1. Right-click the layout and select [Display Instrument Explorer].
2. The [Instrument Explorer] will be displayed.
3. Drag and drop settings onto layout items to configure measurement items.
Measurement items will be applied to layout items along with threshold values and other settings
configured on the measurement items’ advanced settings screens.

*You can review current displayed measurement items by moving the cursor to a layout item while the
layout has focus.

Note: Configuring displayed measurement item settings with the Instrument Explorer
Item type Able to configure displayed Number of measurement items that can
measurement item settings with be set (per item)
the Instrument Explorer?
Monitor windows No
Measured value labels Yes 1 only
Measured value Yes 1 only
graphics
On/off displays Yes Multiple*
Graph No

*If multiple measurement items have been set for an on/off display, OR logic will be applied to the “ON”
judgment conditions.

Set Administrator Mode

This function restricts the ability to change settings to users who know the password. Users who do not know
the password are only able to access the measured value monitor.

224 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Select [Operation/Administrator Mode Switching Settings] in the [Tool] menu.

2. The [Operation/Administrator Mode Switching Settings] screen will be displayed.

Select [User operation/administrator mode switch], enter the password twice, and click the [OK] button.

Operation mode •This mode allows users (operators) who do not know the password to use
dashboard functionality.
•These users can only access the measured value monitor.
Administrator •This mode allows users (administrators) who know the password to use
mode dashboard functionality.
•These users have access to all functionality, including changing settings.

Switch from administrator mode to operation mode

1. Select [Switch to Operation Mode] in the [Tool] menu.

2. The dashboard function will switch to operation mode.

Users will only be able to access the measured value monitor.

225 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Switch from operation mode to administrator mode

1. Select [Switch to Administrator] in the [Tool] menu.

2. The [Password entry] screen will be displayed. Enter the password and click the [OK] button.

3. The dashboard function will switch to administrator mode.

Users will have access to all functionality.

Using demo mode

Demo mode allows you to display fictional measured values for previously created layout elements so that you
can verify the function's operation.
It can be used even when no instruments are connected to the computer.

*It’s necessary to create a layout before using demo mode.

*Starting demo mode does not start instrument recording.
*The monitor values shown in demo mode are not saved on the computer.
*An alarm item that occurred during the demo mode is displayed with the classification [Measured value
alarm (DEMO)]. This item is deleted from the alarm history when the alarm history window is opened/closed
or when the monitor/demo is started.

226 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Select [Switch to demo mode] on the [Tool] menu.

2. The interface will switch to the demo mode toolbar. Click the [Start demo] button.

3. The [Demo settings] screen will be displayed. Configure demo mode and click [Start demo].

Monitor interval Sets the interval at which to update monitor values. ((1/2/5/10/30 sec., 1 min.)

Sine wave Sets the sine wave amplitude to output in demo mode. (-3E+38 to +3E+38)

amplitude

4. Fictional monitor values will be displayed in the layout elements.

5. Click [End demo] to stop monitor value updates.

6. Select [Exit demo mode] on the [Tool] menu to exit demo mode.

Review Instrument Information

This section describes how to review instrument information on a single screen.

227 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Select [Instrument Information List] in the [File] menu.

2. The [Instrument List] screen will be displayed.

ID Indicates the instrument ID. A unique ID is automatically assigned to each

instrument.
Model Indicates the instrument model.
Model comment Displays the instrument name as set on the instrument’s advanced settings screen
(p.185).

Configuring On/Off Display Operation

This section describes how to use the same operation settings (on/off definition settings) for all on/off
displays included in the layout.
1. Right-click the layout and select [Display Tool Window].

228 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. The [Tool Window] will be displayed. Select the [ON/ OFF Displays] tab.

3. Choose the desired on/off display operation and click the [Execution] button.

Indicate on/off state based on measured value •The display will turn on if the measured value exceeds
state the threshold range.
•The display will turn on if the measured value falls
beneath the threshold range.
Indicate on/off state based on operator alarm •The display will turn on if the measured value exceeds
confirmation state the threshold range.
•The display will turn off if the operator alarm state is
[Confirmed].

229 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Alarm Function

Overview

The alarm function saves alarm information in the event that a measured value exceeds the threshold range
while the measured value monitor is being used.
Threshold values can be set for each measurement item on the instrument’s advanced settings screen. Alarm
judgment is performed by the computer.
Note: Measurement data cannot be used in alarm judgment if a communications error has occurred between
the computer and the instrument.
Note: In order to use alarm judgment, you must first configure the alarm settings on the instrument’s
advanced settings screen.
For more information about alarm settings, see “Configure Advanced Instrument Settings” (p.184).

Configure Alarm Operation

This section describes how to configure alarm operation.

1. Select [Alarm Operation Settings] in the [Alarm] menu.

The [Alarm Operation Settings] screen will be displayed.

2.

[Alarm Operation Settings]-[Measurement Data] tab

230 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description
1 Select if you wish to automatically set each alarm to the confirmed state when it is cleared.
2 Select if you wish to display a pop-up alarm history when an alarm occurs.
3 Select if you wish to play an audio alert when an alarm occurs and select the audio file to play.
•Select if you wish to generate an alarm if an alarm has not been cleared after the set amount
4 of time has elapsed after it is confirmed.
•Set the amount of time after which to generate the second alarm in the above instance.

[Alarm Operation Settings]-[Mask Time Period] tab

Item Description
1 Set the time period during which to suppress alarms.

Note
•The valid setting range is 00:00 to 23:59.
•The minimum setting unit is 1 min.

Use the Alarm Function

This section describes how to start using the alarm function.

1. Click the [Start Monitoring] button on the toolbar.

Monitoring of measured values will start.

If alarm settings have been configured for a measurement item, an alarm will be deemed to have
occurred if a measured value exceeds the threshold value.

231 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

When an alarm occurs, the monitor display for the measured value that triggered the alarm will
change.
2.

Note
•Measurement data cannot be used in alarm judgment if a communications error has occurred between
the computer and the instrument.
•If the alarm audio setting has been configured, the computer will play a sound when an alarm occurs. To
mute the sound, click the alarm on the [Alarm log] screen. The alarm sound will stop once all alarms
have been confirmed.

Display the Alarm History

This section describes how to display the alarm history.

1. Select [Display Alarm History] in the [Alarm] menu.

The [Alarm log] screen will be displaye

2. d.

Note
•Unconfirmed alarms are shown in yellow.
•Clicking an alarm will clear it, and the date and time will be entered into the [Time alarm confirmed] field.
•You can display the [Alarm log] screen as a pop-up window when an alarm occurs. For more information
about this setting, see “Configure Alarm Operation” (p.230).

232 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Item Description
1 Date Allows you to select the date for which you wish to view alarms.
2 Time alarm occurred Displays the time at which the alarm occurred.
3 Time alarm cleared Displays the time at which the alarm was cleared.
4 ID Displays the instrument name and serial number.
5 Model Comment Displays the model comment that was set for the instrument (p.185).
Displays the measurement item comment that was set for the
6 Measurement item
measurement item (p.185 ).
Displays the monitor value (measured value) and alarm setting values
7 Information
(upper and lower limit values) at the time the alarm occurred.
8 Category Displays [Measured value alarm] as the alarm category.
Records the confirmation time when you click a row describing an
9 Time alarm confirmed
alarm.
10 Confirm All Click to set all alarms for the day in question to “confirmed.”

233 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed settings for inter-channel calculations

·The logging and dashboard functions allow you to perform calculations using predetermined formulas and
display the calculation results. Up to 16 calculations can be performed simultaneously.

·See below for more information about the procedure for enabling inter-channel calculations with the logging
function.
 Select channels (Setting Calculation Channels)

·See below for more information about the procedure for enabling inter-channel calculations with the
dashboard function.
 Select Channels(Setting Calculation Channels)

Setting a calculation formula

Entering information about a calculation formula

Click the [Enter Formula] button on the logging or dashboard function’s [Channel Settings] dialog box to
display the [Formula Settings] dialog box.

①
② ③ ⑤
④ ⑥

① Formula name checkbox

The formulas are named as follows: Z1 to Z16.
Calculation results for the formulas whose checkboxes have been selected will be displayed by the logging
or dashboard function.
Each checkbox’s selection status is saved separately by the logging and dashboard functions.

② Comment
③ Unit
Comments and units can be entered directly, and they’re shown in the following format in the calculation
results: “Formula name (comment).”
The same comment and one unit are saved by the logging and dashboard functions (the same pair of
settings apply to both).

234 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

④ Formula
The formula can be set on the [Formula Entry (Individual)] dialog box, which is displayed by clicking the
formula display area.
Calculation results based on the set formula will be displayed by the logging or dashboard function.
The same formula is used by both the logging and dashboard functions.
See below for more information about how to enter formulas.
 Entering formulas

⑤ Upper limit value

⑥ Lower limit value
The upper and lower limit values are threshold value settings used by the dashboard’s alarm function.
The upper and lower limit values are not displayed by the logging function.
Values can also be specified using exponents, and leaving a value blank means that no threshold value
has been specified.
See below for more information about the alarm function.
 Alarm Function

⑦ Formula settings file

You can save and load formula settings (formulas, constants, and channel settings) to and from files.
Files are saved in the TSV (tab-delimited text file) format.

Entering a formula

You can edit formulas on the [Formula Entry (Individual)] dialog box.

①
②
③ ⑤

① Formula name
Displays the name of the formula being edited.

② Formula

235 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Allows you to edit the formula that will be used to generate the calculation results displayed by the
logging or dashboard function.
You can enter formulas either directly or using interface elements ③ through ⑥.
The following can be specified as part of a formula:
Numerical values (including in exponential notation), symbols (the four arithmetic operations,
parentheses, etc.), operators (function name and parameter combinations), formula names, channel names,
and constant names

③ Operator entry
Displays buttons for operators (function names) that can be used in formulas.
Click a button to insert the operator and an opening parenthesis into the formula.
See below for more information about operators.
 List of operators

④ Formula name entry

Select the formula name in the drop-down menu and click the [Input] button to enter the specified
formula name into the formula.
You can specify Z1 to Z16 as formula names, but the formula will be set so that it is not calculated if the
formula cannot be finalized.
Example: If you set Z1 to Z3 and Z3 to Z1, the checkbox will be deselected so that no calculation is
performed because the formula cannot be finalized.

⑤ Numerical value and symbol entry

Click a button to enter the text of the button label (values, four arithmetic operations, etc.) into the
formula.
The comma symbol is used to specify function parameters, and the period is used as the decimal point
symbol.

⑥ Constant and channel entry

You can specify constants or channels to use and enter them into the formula.
Use the tabs to switch between the settings panels.
See below for more information about each panel.
 Setting a constant
 Setting a channel to use

Setting a constant

You can assign constants to the lowercase letters a through p, for example when you wish to use a constant
as a common value in multiple formulas.

① ②

236 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

① Constant name button

Click to enter a constant name (a through p) into the formula.

② Constant value entry

Allows you to directly edit the constant.
Values can also be specified using exponents, and leaving a value blank or entering an invalid value is the
same as specifying the value 0.

③ Value entry
Click a button to enter the text of the button label into the constant value field.
Click the [+-] button to change the sign.

Setting a channel to use

You can assign channels for use in formulas.

A total of 99 channels (C01 to C99) can be specified.
If a channel that has not been selected on the logging or dashboard funct’on's [Channel Settings] dialog box
is specified, the calculation results will be displayed as an invalid value.

① ②

③
① Channel name
Click a channel name (C01 to C99) to enter it into the formula.

② List of channel settings

Displays a list of currently set channels.
This list cannot be edited directly.

③ [CH Setting] button

Click the button to display the [Channel Settings] dialog box (④).

④ [Channel Settings] dialog box

Displays a list of the channels that have been selected on the logging or dashboard function’s [Channel
Settings] screen.
Selecting the checkbox of a channel you wish to use will add the selected channel information above the
row selected in the list of channel settings.

237 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

List of operators

Number of
Operator parameters
Calculation description
name Example
operator
ABS 1 Returns the absolute value of parameter 1. (Negative values become
ABS(x) positive.)
EXP 1 Returns the exponent to which the base e must be raised to obtain
EXP(x) parameter 1 (parameter 1 as a power of e).
LOG 1 Returns the base 10 logarithm of parameter 1, which must be
LOG(x) positive.
LN 1 Returns the natural logarithm of parameter 1, which must be
LN(x) positive.
SQR 1 Returns the square root of parameter 1.
SQR(x)
CBR 1 Returns the cube root of parameter 1.
CBR(x)
PWR 2 Returns the exponent to which the base parameter 1 must be raised
PWR(x, y) to obtain parameter 2.
(The symbol ^ cannot be used.)
SIN 1 Returns the sine of parameter 1. (Specify the parameter in degrees.)
SIN(x)
COS 1 Returns the cosine of parameter 1. (Specify the parameter in
COS(x) degrees.)
TAN 1 Returns the tangent of parameter 1. (Specify the parameter in
TAN(x) degrees.)
ASIN 1 Returns the arc sine of parameter 1, which must be greater than or
ASIN(x) equal to -1 and less than or equal to 1, in the range of -90° to 90°.
ACOS 1 Returns the arc cosine of parameter 1, which must be greater than
ACOS(x) or equal to -1 and less than or equal to 1, in the range of -90° to 90°.
ATAN 1 Returns the arc tangent of parameter 1 in the range of -90° to 90°.
ATAN(x)
ATAN2 2 Returns the arc tangent of the value obtained by dividing parameter
ATAN2(x, y) 2 by parameter 1 in the range of -90° to 90°.
FLOOR 2 Returns the value obtained by rounding down parameter 1 to the
FLOOR(x, y) number of decimal places specified by parameter 2.
CEIL 2 Returns the value obtained by rounding up parameter 1 to the
CEIL (x, y) number of decimal places specified in parameter 2.
ROUND 2 Returns the value obtained by rounding off parameter 1 to the
ROUND (x, y) number of decimal places specified by parameter 2.
*Formula examples included in the explanation use x to indicate the first parameter and y to indicate the
second parameter.

238 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed settings for automatic output (daily/weekly/monthly

reports)
·This section describes the basic specifications for automatic output (daily/weekly/monthly reports), along
with detailed settings.

·See below for more information about the procedure for enabling automatic output (reports) with the
logging function.
 Configure the logging settings
·See below for more information about the procedure for enabling automatic output (reports) with the
dashboard function.
 Start or Stop the Measured Value Monitor

Basic report specifications

<Example of daily report output>

239 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Report contents Description

1 Instrument Outputs information for all instruments selected in the [Channel Selection] dialog box as a table.
information
2 Channel Information Outputs information for all channels selected in the [Channel Selection] dialog box as a table.
If upper and lower limit values have been set for the channel, outputs the set values*1.
3 Data list Calculates the average, maximum, and minimum values for each channel at the specified interval
(30 min. or 1 hr.) and outputs them as a table.
4 Graph Calculates the average, maximum, and minimum values for each channel at the specified interval
(the same interval as the data list) and outputs them as a graph.
Three graphs (for three channels) are output per page.
5 Alarm list*1 Outputs the number of alarm events during each channel’s statistical interval (30 min. or 1 hr.) and
outputs them as a table.
6 Alarm graph*1 Outputs the number of alarm events during each channel’s statistical interval (the same interval as
the alarm list) and outputs them as a bar graph.
Three graphs (for three channels) are output per page.
7 Alarm history*1 Outputs information about all the alarms that occurred during the measurement period as a table
in the order they occurred.

*1: Output available only when using the dashboard function.

Opening the automatic output settings

1. Click the button [ ] shown in the red rectangle below on the [Logging Settings] or [Start Monitoring]
dialog box.

2. The [Automatic Report Output Settings] dialog box will open.

240 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed settings for automatic output

Configuring [General] settings

Setting Description
1 Output report (Daily) Specifies whether to output the reports.
2 Data save destination GENNECT One Outputs reports to the GENNECT One data list.
Folder Outputs reports to a user-specified folder.
3 Save format Excel Outputs reports in the Excel format.
4 Save method*3 Back up data The following two files will be created.
1.·File:<FilenameBody>.<Extension>.
2. Backup file: <FilenameBody>_<FilenameSuffix>.<Extension>.
*If there are multiple files with the same suffix, a sequential
number will be appended to the end of the filename to generate a
unique name.
Do not back up ·Always overwrites the most recent file with the following
data filename: <FilenameBody>.<Extension>.
5 Filename*3 Specifies the string to use as the <FilenameBody>.
The default value is “AutoReport.”
6 Comments Specifies the comment to output to reports.
7 Logo Hioki logo Outputs the Hioki logo to reports.
No logo Outputs no logo to reports.
User-specified Outputs a user-specified image as the logo.
image
8 Report contents Instrument information Channel information Data list Graph
Alarm list*1 Alarm graph*1 Alarm history*1
Specifies which of the above contents to output to the report.
(Multiple contents may be selected).*2
Click [Details] to open the [Report contents Detailed Settings]
dialog box.
9 Display format for measured Decimal Outputs measured values and statistical values to reports (data
values and statistical values lists and graphs) as decimal values.
Exponent Outputs measured values and statistical values to reports (data
lists and graphs) as exponential values.
Number of decimal Specifies how many decimal places to include in measured
places values and statistical values being output to reports (data lists
and graphs).

*1: Setting applies only when using the dashboard function. Not displayed when using the logging function.

*2: If the [Instrument information] checkbox is not selected, only the daily report title portion of the report
will be output.

241 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*3: Filename rules

Example) Filename (FilenameBody): AutoReport, Measurement start date： 2021-08-31

・If the save method is “Back up data“”

"AutoReport.xlsx" and a backup file: AutoReport_2021-08-31.xlsx will be created.
If “AutoReport.xlsx” exists in the specified destination, it will be overwritten.
If the backup file: AutoReport_2021-08-31.xlsx exists in the specified destination, a sequential number will be appended to the end of
the filename, such as “AutoReport_2021-08-31_1.xlsx”.

・If the save method is “Do not back up data”

Only “AutoReport.xlsx” will be created.
If “AutoReport.xlsx” exists in the specified destination, it will be overwritten.

Configuring [Output channel selection] settings

·Select channels to output to reports from the channels that have been selected for logging.
·Channels whose checkbox is deselected here will also be saved as logging data.
·You can specify whether to output the average, maximum, and minimum values for the statistical interval
(30 min. or 1 hr.) for each channel.

Item Description
1 Select the checkboxes of the channels you wish to output to the report.
2 AVG Select this checkbox if you wish to output the average value for each statistical
interval (30 min. or 1 hr.).
3 MAX Select this checkbox if you wish to output the maximum value for each statistical
interval (30 min. or 1 hr.).
4 MIN Select this checkbox if you wish to output the minimum value for each statistical
interval (30 min. or 1 hr.).
5 Allows you to limit the measurement channels displayed in the list to only those that have

been selected.
6 Allows you to select all or clear all channels (Item 1).
7 Allows you to refine the measurement channels displayed in the list by channel name.

242 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed output settings on the [Output report] tab

Setting Description
1 Weekly report Starting day of the week Specify the first day of the week report.
Output day of week Specify whether to output the day of the week on the date.
Output year in list Specifies whether to output the date in the list as a year, month,
and day.
Output year in graph Specifies whether to output the date of the graph as a year,
month, and day.
filename Specify the file name of the weekly report.
2 Monthly report Starting day Specify the first day of the monthly report.
Output day of week Specify whether to output the day of the week on the date.
Output year in list Specifies whether to output the date in the list as a year, month,
and day.
Output year in graph Specifies whether to output the date of the graph as a year,
month, and day.
Scale interval Specifies the scale interval on the horizontal axis (day) of the
graph.
filename Specify the file name of the monthly report.
3 Demand list settings*1 Output the integrated Output active energy values for each time division.
power in each time
division *2, 3
Division settings *2 Division 1 - 6: Specify whether the time division is valid or
invalid.
End Time: Specify the valid or invalid and end time of the
division end time.
* You can specify the start time and electricity rate for the time
division settings.
* The start time and end time are specified in hours.
Output the electricity Output the electricity charges by time division using the active
charges *2, 3, 4, 5, 6 electric energy and electricity rate.
* Only electricity charges can be output without outputting
the integrated power in each time division.
Currency unit *2, 4, 5, 6 Specify the currency unit of electricity charges.
Calculation method of time You can select the method for calculating the active energy for
division *2, 3, 4, 5, 6 each time division.
Average:
Outputs hourly average values of time division values,
electricity charges, and CO2 conversion values.
Addition:
Outputs time division values, electricity charges, and CO2
conversion values as integrated values.
Output CO2 conversion Output the active energy during the period converted into CO2
value *2, 3 emissions.
CO2 conversion rate *2 Specify the conversion rate of the CO2 conversion value.
Aggregation period of CO2 You can select the aggregation period for CO2 conversion values.
conversion value All day :

243 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Display in 24-hour aggregation.

Only period :
Aggregate and display only the specified time period.

*1: If you select to output items such as integrated power, integrated demand power, and demand power from
the measurement items of PW3360, PW3365, PQ3100, and PQ3198, the [Demand list] tab will be added
to the report.
*2: If you select to output the demand active power (consumption) from the measurement items of PW3360,
PW3365, PQ3100, PQ3198, the target row will be added at the bottom of the [Demand list].

Output example

*3: When the calculation method of time division is set to "Average," CO2 conversion value, the integrated
power in each time division, and the electricity charges are calculated values per hour.
The aggregated value within the specified period can be calculated by multiplying the time within the
specified period.
*4: When the calculation method of time division is specified as "Addition", the output column will change as
shown in the figure below.

Output example

*5: The output value of the electricity charge is a reference purposes only.
(Output values cannot be used for billing or to establish power use.)
*6: This value differs from the electricity charges (ENERGY COST) parameter output by the PW3360, and
PW3365.

Configuring detailed output settings for report contents

·You can configure more detailed output settings for report output parameters (data list, graph, alarm list,
alarm graph, and alarm history).

1. Click the [Details…] button on the [Automatic Report Output Settings] dialog box.

244 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. The [Report contents Detailed Settings] dialog box will open.

See below for more information about the settings on each tab.

Configuring detailed output settings on the [Data list] tab

Setting Description
1 Instrument display Model#Serial number Outputs instrument display names in the format “Model#Serial
names number.”
Instrument + number Outputs instrument names in the format “Instrument 1,”
“Instrument 2,” “Instrument 3,” etc.
The numbers are the same as those used in [Instrument
information].
2 Channel display names Measurement item names Outputs the channel-specific measurement parameter as the
channel display name.
Example: U1_Ins_Avg (voltage RMS / average value)
ID Outputs the channel-specific ID as the channel display name.
Examples: U1_Ins_Avg
CH + number Outputs the channel display name in the format “CH 1,” “CH 2,”
“CH 3,” etc.
The numbers are the same as those used in [Channel
information].
3 Statistical interval 30 min. blocks Outputs average, maximum, and minimum values calculated
every 30 min.
1 hr. blocks Outputs average, maximum, and minimum values calculated
every 1 hr.
4 Statistical values Specifies whether to output the average value, maximum value,
during period time at which maximum value occurred, minimum value, time at
which minimum value occurred, and total for the measurement
period. (Multiple checkboxes may be selected.)
5 Highlight measured Highlight maximum values Specifies whether to highlight maximum values during the
values measurement period using color.
Color Specifies the color to use to highlight maximum values.
Highlight minimum values Specifies whether to highlight minimum values during the
measurement period using color.
Color Specifies the color to use to highlight minimum values.
6 No. of columns/page 3, 6, or 9 columns Specifies the number of data list columns to output per page.

Configuring detailed output settings on the [Graph] tab

245 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Setting Description
1 Instrument display Model#Serial number Outputs instrument display names in the format “Model#Serial
names number.”
Instrument + number Outputs instrument names in the format “Instrument 1,”
“Instrument 2,” “Instrument 3,” etc.
2 Channel display names Measurement item Outputs the channel-specific measurement parameter as the
names channel display name.
Example: U1_Ins_Avg (voltage RMS / average value)
ID Outputs the channel-specific ID as the channel display name.
Examples: U1_Ins_Avg
CH + number Outputs the channel display name in the format “CH 1,” “CH 2,”
“CH 3,” etc.
3 Vertical axis – Axis label Display Specifies whether to display an axis label for the vertical axis.
Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the axis label for the
vertical axis.
4 Vertical axis – Scale label Display Specifies whether to display a scale label for the vertical axis.
Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the scale label for the
vertical axis.
5 Vertical axis – Grid lines Display Specifies whether to display grid lines for the vertical axis.
6 Horizontal axis – Axis Display Specifies whether to display an axis label for the horizontal axis.
label Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the axis label for the
horizontal axis.
7 Horizontal axis – Scale Display Specifies whether to display a scale label for the horizontal axis.
label Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the scale label for the
horizontal axis.
8 Horizontal axis – Grid Display Specifies whether to display grid lines for the horizontal axis.
lines
9 Horizontal axis – Scale 1 hr. / 3 hr. Specifies the scale interval for the horizontal axis.
interval
10 Upper/lower limit value Display upper limit Specifies whether to display upper limit values of alarms on
of alarms display*1 values graphs.
Display lower limit Specifies whether to display lower limit values of alarms on
values graphs.

*1: Setting applies only when using the dashboard function. Not displayed when using the logging function.

246 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed output settings on the [Alarm list] tab

Setting Description
1 Instrument display Model#Serial number Outputs instrument display names in the format “Model#Serial
names number.”
Instrument + number Outputs instrument names in the format “Instrument 1,”
“Instrument 2,” “Instrument 3,” etc.
2 Channel display names Measurement item Outputs the channel-specific measurement parameter as the
names channel display name.
Example: U1_Ins_Avg (voltage RMS / average value)
ID Outputs the channel-specific ID as the channel display name.
Examples: U1_Ins_Avg
CH + number Outputs the channel display name in the format “CH 1,” “CH 2,”
“CH 3,” etc.
3 Statistical interval 30 min. blocks Outputs the number of alarm events per 30 min.
1 hr. blocks Outputs the number of alarm events per 1 hr.
4 Statistical values during Specifies whether to output the average value, maximum value,
period minimum value, and total for the measurement period. (Multiple
checkboxes may be selected.)
5 Highlight measured Highlight maximum Specifies whether to highlight maximum values during the
values values measurement period using color.
Color Specifies the color to use to highlight minimum values.
Highlight minimum Specifies whether to highlight minimum values during the
values measurement period using color.
Color Specifies the color to use to highlight minimum values.
6 No. of columns/page 3, 6, or 9 columns Specifies the number of data list columns to output per page.

247 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed output settings on the [Alarm graph] tab

Setting Description
1 Instrument display names Model#Serial number Outputs instrument display names in the format
“Model#Serial number.”
Instrument + number Outputs instrument names in the format “Instrument 1,”
“Instrument 2,” “Instrument 3,” etc.
2 Channel display names Measurement item Outputs the channel-specific measurement parameter as the
names channel display name.
Example: U1_Ins_Avg (voltage rms / average value)
ID Outputs the channel-specific ID as the channel display name.
Examples: U1_Ins_Avg
CH + number Outputs the channel display name in the format “CH 1,” “CH
2,” “CH 3,” etc.
3 Vertical axis – Axis label Display Specifies whether to display an axis label for the vertical axis.
Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the axis label for
the vertical axis.
4 Vertical axis – Scale label Display Specifies whether to display a scale label for the vertical axis.
Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the scale label for
the vertical axis.
5 Vertical axis – Display range Automatic scaling for Automatically specifies the vertical axis display range for each
individual graphs graph.
Same scale for all Uses the display range for the graph with the greatest display
graphs range (out of all graphs being output) as the vertical axis
display range for all graphs.
6 Vertical axis – Grid lines Display Specifies whether to display grid lines for the vertical axis.
7 Horizontal axis – Axis label Display Specifies whether to display an axis label for the horizontal
axis.
Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the axis label for
the horizontal axis.
8 Horizontal axis – Scale label Display Specifies whether to display a scale label for the horizontal
axis.
Size Specifies the font size (in points) to use for the scale label for
the horizontal axis.
9 Horizontal axis – Grid lines Display Specifies whether to display grid lines for the horizontal axis.
10 Horizontal axis – Scale interval 1 hr. / 3 hr. Specifies the scale interval for the horizontal axis.

248 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed output settings on the [Alarm history] tab

Setting Description
1 Instrument display Model#Serial number Outputs instrument display names in the format “Model#Serial
names number” in the report’s “Instrument” column.
Instrument + number Outputs instrument names in the format “Instrument 1,”
“Instrument 2,” “Instrument 3,” etc., in the report’s
“Instrument” column.
2 Channel display names Measurement item names Outputs the channel-specific measurement parameter as the
channel display name in the report’s “Measurement item”
column.
Example: U1_Ins_Avg (voltage RMS / average value)
ID Outputs the channel-specific ID as the channel display name in
the report’s “Measurement item” column.
Examples: U1_Ins_Avg
CH + number Outputs the channel display name in the format “CH 1,” “CH 2,”
“CH 3,” etc., in the report’s “Measurement item” column.

·[Alarm history] output contents

Item Description
① Time alarm occurred Displays the time and date at which the alarm occurred.
Displays the time and date at which the alarm was cleared (when the measured value moved
② Time alarm cleared
from outside the upper/lower limit values to within the upper/lower limit values).
③ Instrument Displays the instrument name.
④ Measurement item Displays the channel display name.
⑤ Value Displays the measured value (monitor value) when the alarm occurred.
⑥ Unit Displays the measured value’s unit.
⑦ Lower limit Displays the lower limit value set for the channel.
⑧ Upper limit Displays the upper limit value set for the channel.
⑨ Time alarm confirmed Displays the time and date at which the alarm was reviewed.

249 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring detailed settings for automatic output (CSV)

·This section describes the detailed settings for automatic output (CSV).

·See below for more information about the procedure for enabling automatic output (CSV) with the logging
function.
 Configure the logging settings

·See below for more information about the procedure for enabling automatic output (CSV) with the
dashboard function.
 Start or Stop the Measured Value Monitor

1. Click the button [ ] shown in the red rectangle below on the [Logging Settings] or [Start Monitoring]
dialog box.

2. The [Automatic output settings (CSV)] dialog box will open.

Item Description
1 Save method*1 Back up data The following two files will be created.
1.·File:<FilenameBody>.<Extension>.
2. Backup file: <FilenameBody>_<FilenameSuffix>.<Extension>.
*If there are multiple files with the same suffix, a sequential number will be
appended to the end of the filename to generate a unique name.
Do not back up ·Always overwrites the most recent file with the following filename:
data <FilenameBody>.<Extension>.
2 Filename*1 Specifies the string to use as the <FilenameBody>.
The default value is “AutoCsv.”
3 Number of Specifies how many decimal places to include in measured values being output to
decimal places the CSV file.

250 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4 Comment Specifies a string to include in the CSV file’s comment header.

5 [OK] button Saves the settings in the dialog box and closes the window.
6 [Cancel] button Discards the settings in the dialog box and closes the window.

*1: Filename rules

Example) Filename (FilenameBody): AutoReport, Measurement start date and time： 2021-08-31 12:34:56

・If the save method is “Back up data”

"AutoCsv.xlsx" and a backup file: AutoCsv_2021-08-31_12-34-56.xlsx will be created.
If “AutoCsv.xlsx” exists in the specified destination, it will be overwritten.
If the backup file: AutoCsv_2021-08-31_12-34-56.xlsx exists in the specified destination, a sequential number will be appended to the
end of the filename, such as “AutoCsv_2021-08-31_12-34-56_1.xlsx”.

・If the save method is “Do not back up data”

Only “AutoCsv.xlsx” will be created.
If “AutoCsv.xlsx” exists in the specified destination, it will be overwritten.

251 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Manually Outputting Reports (Daily, Weekly, and Monthly Reports)

Reports (daily, weekly, and monthly reports) can be generated automatically from logging data using the
logging/dashboard function.

See below for example output.

 Basic report specifications

Procedure

1. Select the [Data] and [Group], and then select logging data to display a pop-up menu.

※ You can also select multiple sets of data to output.

※ If you select data other than logging data, no report will be generated.
※ If you select multiple sets of logging data, no report will be generated unless all selected data satisfies
the following conditions:
·All data is associated with the same instrument and serial number.
·All logging measurement parameters are the same.
·There is no overlap in the logging data’s measurement period.
·All data has the same logging interval.

2. Select [Generate report from selected data] from the pop-up menu.

3. When the screen with report output settings is displayed, specify the output format, folder, and other
information and then click [Output Report].
Click the [ ] button to configure detailed settings such as the output filename.

※ For more information about detailed report output settings, see below.

252 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

 Configuring detailed settings for automatic output

4. A file in the selected format will be generated in the specified folder.

※ The report (daily, weekly, and monthly) output function performs the same processing whether it is
invoked automatically or manually. Consequently, filename rules and operation such as whether the file
is backed up are the same as for automatically generated files.
For more information about filename rules, see below.
 Configuring [General] settings

253 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Manually Acquiring Files from an Instrument (File Acquisition [MANUAL])

•Acquire files from an instrument's external storage or external media.
•With the exception of the PQ3100, files cannot be acquired from an instrument's internal memory.
• While the measurement device is under recording (automatic saving), it may affect the measurement of
the main unit of the measurement device. Stop the recording (automatic saving) of the measurement device
before acquiring the file with this function.

Supported Instruments
•The manual file acquisition function supports the following instruments.
Model Name Firmware URL

version

PQ3100 POWER QUARITY Ver. 2.30 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6387

ANALYZER later

PQ3198 POWER QUARITY Ver. 1.10 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6503

ANALYZER later

PW3360 CLAMP ON POWER Ver. 3.20 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5589

LOGGER later

PW3365 CLAMP ON POWER Ver. 2.10 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5565

LOGGER later

PW3390 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 2.01 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6413

later

PW6001 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 3.02 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5796

later

PW8001 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/power-

later analyzer/id_412384

LR8400, LR8401, MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 1.28 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5613

LR8402 later

LR8410 WIRELESS Ver. 1.42 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5697

LOGGING STATION later

LR8450, LR8450-01 MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 1.20 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6535

later

MR6000 MEMORY HiCORDER Ver. 2.12 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6439

later

Limitations
Limitations on manual file acquisition
Item Limitation Remarks

Number of instruments from which files can be acquired simultaneously 1

Communications interface LAN

Communications protocol FTP

254 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Limitations on communications
Item Limitation Remarks

Interface LAN

Network range for automatic _._._.2 to _._._.254

search *Automatic search is limited to the same network range as the computer.

DHCP Not supported

Workflow

Connect the instrument(s) to the computer with a LAN cable (p.17)

Start manual file acquisition (p.255)

Start manual file acquisition

1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

2. Select the [LAN] navigation bar.

3. Click the [File Acquisition (MANUAL)] button ( ).

4. If authentication has been enabled for the instrument’s FTP server, the [FTP Authentication] screen will
be displayed.
Enter the username and password and click the [OK] button.

255 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. The [File Acquisition (MANUAL)] screen will open.

•You can use this screen to acquire files from an instrument’s external storage or external media.

Note
*This example describes how to select and manually acquire files from a PW3360.

6. Click the “ftp://192.168.1.50” root folder in the tree on the left side of the screen to expand the folder.
Next, expand other folders in the hierarchy and select the measurement (date) folder.

256 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Note
*See “List of Target Files” below for more information about the types of measurement files that can be
selected for each instrument.

7. Select [GENNECT One] under [Save destination] and click the [Save] button.
Note
*You may be unable to select [GENNECT One] as the [Save destination] for some file types. See “List of
Target Files” below for more information.

8. The measurement data will be saved in the data list on GENNECT One’s [Data] tab.

Note
*You can save the measurement data folder in the desired folder by selecting [User-selected folder] as
the [Save destination] and clicking the [Save] button.
*You can compress the measurement data folder as a ZIP file and save it in the desired folder by
selecting the [ZIP format] checkbox when [User-selected folder] is selected as the [Save destination].
*The type of data that is saved (file or folder) varies by instrument. See “List of Target Files” below for
more information.

257 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

List of storage media supported by the manual file acquisition function

Instrument Supported storage media

Model Name Internal SD card USB drive CF card
memory/SSD
PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER Yes Yes ― ―
(Internal Memory)
PQ3198 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER ― Yes ― ―
PW3360 CLAMP ON POWER LOGGER ― Yes ― ―
PW3365 CLAMP ON POWER LOGGER ― Yes ― ―
PW3390 POWER ANALYZER ― ― Yes Yes
PW6001 POWER ANALYZER ― ― Yes ―
PW8001 POWER ANALYZER ― ― Yes ―
LR8400, 01, MEMORY LOGGER ― ― Yes Yes
02
LR8410, 16 WIRELESS LOGGING STATION ― Yes Yes ―
LR8450, -01 MEMORY LOGGER ― Yes Yes ―
MR6000 MEMORY HICORDER Yes (SSD) Yes Yes ―

List of target files

Instrument Selected data Save destinations Saved data
Model Name Model Extension GENNECT User- Model Remarks
One selected
folder

PQ3100 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER Folder ― Yes Yes Folder (*2)

PQ3198 POWER QUALITY ANALYZER Folder ― Yes Yes Folder (*2)
PW3360 CLAMP ON POWER LOGGER Folder ― Yes Yes Folder (*2)
PW3365
PW3390 POWER ANALYZER Files CSV Yes Yes Files (*3)
PW6001 Other ― Yes
PW8001 POWER ANALYZER Files BIN Yes Yes Files (*3)
CSV Yes Yes
PNG Yes Yes
SET Yes Yes
MAT Yes Yes
DBC Yes Yes
LR8400, 01.02 MEMORY LOGGER Files MEM Yes Yes Files (*3)
LR8410 WIRELESS LOGGING CSV Yes/― Yes
STATION (*1)
TXT ― Yes
SET ― Yes
Other ― Yes
LR8450,-01 MEMORY LOGGER Files MEM Yes Yes Files (*3)
CSV Yes/― Yes
(*1)
MF4 Yes Yes
TXT ― Yes
SET ― Yes
Other ― Yes
MR6000 MEMORY HICORDER Files MEM Yes Yes Files (*3)
REC Yes Yes
MDF Yes Yes
FLT Yes Yes
CSV Yes/― Yes
(*1)
DAT Yes Yes
CFG Yes Yes
Other ― Yes

(*1) Numerical calculation result files cannot be saved to GENNECT One.

(*2) The selected measurement folder (date folder) will be saved.
(*3) The selected measurement folder will be saved.

258 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Automatically receive instrument files (File Transfer [AUTO])

・The file transfer (AUTO) function uses an FTP link between the instrument and your PC to transfer files
created by the instrument to the PC. Transferred files are saved in the application’s database.
•Recording media such as an SD memory card or CF card must be inserted into the instrument.
•This function is used to acquire instrument measurement files after setting up an FTP server on your PC.
*Measurement files cannot be acquired by GENNECT One while your PC is not on.
*Measurement files will not be saved on MR6000, PW3360, PW3365, PQ3100, PQ3198, LR8450, PW8001 if
that instrument’s file transfer (AUTO) function is enabled. Verify that you were able to receive
measurement files with GENNECT One before turning off your PC.
*It will take about 7 minutes for the measurement file transferred from the measurement instrument to be
reflected in the data list.
*If another FTP server already exists on your PC, you will not be able to acquire measurement files using
this function.
*If your security software is set to restrict communication to your PC, you may not be able to use this
feature to acquire measurement files. In this case, you need to refer to your security software's manual and
set it to allow FTP communication from the instrument to your PC (port number range: 21,65000-65020).

Supported instruments
The file transfer (AUTO) function supports the following instruments:
Model number Name Supported URL

versions
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6387
PQ3100 *1 POWER QUARITY V2.30 or later

ANALYZER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6503
PQ3198 *1,*3 POWER QUARITY V1.10 or later

ANALYZER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5589
PW3360 *1 CLAMP ON POWER V3.20 or later

LOGGER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5565
PW3365 *1 CLAMP ON POWER V2.10 or later

LOGGER
https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/power-
PW8001 *2,*4,*5 *6 POWER ANALYZER V1.00 or later
analyzer/id_412384
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5613
LR8400, LR8401, MEMORY HiLOGGER V1.28 or later

LR8402 *1
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5697
LR8410 *1 WIRELESS LOGGING V1.42 or later

STATION
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6535
LR8450, LR8450-01 *1,*5 MEMORY HiLOGGER V1.20 or later
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6439
MR6000 MEMORY HiCORDER V2.10 or later

*1. Start/stop measurement of the instrument when this function is started/stopped.

*2. Start/stop integration of the instrument when this function is started/stopped.
*3. All of the analysis data of the measurement instrument is reset when starting/stopping this feature. It is recommended to use this
feature after the recording and analysis of the measurement data has been completed (Data reset state).
*4. All of the integrated data of the measurement instrument is reset by starting/stopping this feature. It is recommended to use this
feature after the recording and analysis of the integration data has been completed (Data reset state).
*5. When this function starts, the start/stop control setting (trigger, start/stop time control) of the measurement instrument is released
and measurement starts.
*6 Measurement is not started/stopped when the connection-specific integration or time control function (actual time, timer) is enabled
when this function is started/stopped (except in remote monitoring mode).

259 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Limitations
Limitations on the file transfer (AUTO) function
Aspect of function’s operation Limitation Remarks

Maximum number of 15

connected instruments

Communications interface LAN

Maximum time until received 7min. Maximum time for a file that has been

files are visible successfully received via FTP to show up in the

Interface application’s database

Limitations on communications
Aspect of function’s operation Limitation Remarks

Interface LAN

Automatic search network □.□.□.2 – □.□.□.254

scope *Limited to same network scope as computer.

DHCP Not supported

260 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Using the function

Connect the instrument and PC with a LAN cable (p.17)

Enable the file transfer (AUTO) function (p.261)

Disable the file transfer (AUTO) function (p.264)

Check or change file transfer (AUTO) function settings (p.265)

Enable the file transfer (AUTO) function

The instrument will start measurement automatically once the settings have been configured. Before
enabling the file transfer (AUTO) function, configure the instrument’s measurement condition settings and
connect it to the device or circuit to be measured.

Enable on application launch

This option starts file transfers for the target instrument if the application is launched while connected to an
instrument supported by the file transfer (AUTO) function.

1. Launch GENNECT One.

2. If GENNECT One detects that an instrument supported by the file transfer (AUTO) function is
connected to the PC but that automatic file transfers are not enabled, it will display the following
message:

3. [Click [Yes] to enable the file transfer (AUTO) function for the target instrument.
4. This processing may take several minutes. For more information about this processing, see ”Enabling
file transfer (AUTO) (details)”.

5. Once file transfer (AUTO) is started, the instrument will start measurement.

*For the MEMORY HiCORDER MR6000, enabling file transfer (AUTO) will not cause the instrument to
start measurement. Press the instrument’s [START] button or use the LAN remote control function to
start measurement.

261 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configure settings from the [Console] tab

You can start file transfers for the target instrument by setting the [File Transfer (AUTO)] button to [ON] for
the connected instrument on the [Console] tab’s instrument settings screen.

1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

2. Select the [LAN] navigation bar.

3. Click the [File Transfer (AUTO)] button（ ）to enable it（ ）.

4. The file transfer (AUTO) setting for the target instrument will be enabled.

This processing may take several minutes. For more information about this processing, see “Enabling
file transfer (AUTO) (details)”.

5. Once file transfer (AUTO) is enabled, the instrument will start measurement.
*For the MEMORY HiCORDER MR6000, enabling file transfer (AUTO) will not cause the instrument to
start measurement. Press the instrument’s [START] button or use the LAN remote control function to
start measurement.

6. When the measurement device creates a measurement file, the measurement file is transferred to the
PC.
* The transfer timing is either when the measurement device stops measuring, or when the
measurement file/folder is split by the device.
* The measurement file is automatically set to be split once a day, except for the recorder (MR6000) and
Power Analyzer (PW8001).
* It will take about 7 minutes for the measurement file transferred from the measurement instrument
to be reflected in the data list.

262 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Enabling file transfer (AUTO) (details)

Setting up the FTP server (if not yet set up)

Set up the FTP server on your PC if you have not already done so.

Click [Yes] on the confirmation dialog box that is displayed.

*The FTP server setup process will not start if you click [No].

Setting up the FTP server requires administrator privileges.

When the [User Account Control] dialog box is displayed, click [Yes].

It may take several minutes to set up the FTP server.

If the FTP server setup process fails, you can display a detailed description of any errors that occurred.
See List of error codes for a description of how to configure the server manually.

Instrument settings

Instrument settings necessary for transferring files will be configured automatically.

Click [Yes] on the confirmation dialog box that is displayed.

263 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*If measurement has already begun, it will need to be stopped in order to start file transfer (AUTO).
*File transfer (AUTO) will not start if you click [No].

Configuration of the instrument settings completes the process of preparing to use the file transfer (AUTO)
function. Click [OK].

When the instrument creates a file, it will be automatically transferred to the PC and saved in the
application’s database.

Disable file transfer (AUTO)

As long as file transfer is enabled, the instrument will attempt to send files, even if it is no longer connected
to the PC. If using the instrument while not connected to a PC, it is recommended to disable file transfer
(AUTO).

Configuring the setting from the [Console] tab

You can stop file transfers by setting the [File Transfers (AUTO)] button to [OFF] for the connected
instrument on the [Console] tab’s instrument settings screen.

1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

2. Select the [LAN] navigation bar.

3. Click the [File Transfer (AUTO)] button（ ）and disable it （ ）.

264 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. The file transfer setting for the target instrument will be disabled.
This processing may take several minutes.
*If measurement has already begun, it will need to be stopped in order to start file transfer (AUTO).

Check or change the file transfer (AUTO) setting

This section describes how to check or change file transfer (AUTO) settings.

1. Display the [Common Settings]-[File transfer (AUTO)] settings dialog box by either of the methods
shown below.

 Select the [Settings] menu on the main screen and choose [Application Settings]. Then choose [Common
Settings] and click [Start]. When the [Common Settings] dialog box is displayed, select the [Console]
tab.

 Select the [Console] tab on the main screen and click the settings button（ ）.

2. The [Common Settings]-[Console] dialog box will be displayed.

Configure the settings shown below.

265 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Set up or check the FTP server

This section describes how to check the settings that control the FTP server used by the file transfer (AUTO)
function and how to set up the FTP server.

 Click the [Check settings] button to check whether the FTP server has been properly configured.
A list of FTP server settings will be displayed.
If the message “PASS” is indicated for all settings, your PC’s FTP server has been configured properly.

 Click the [Start] button to set up a new FTP server.

If the [Check settings] function indicates that your PC’s FTP server has not been configured properly,
use this function to set up the FTP server. This processing may take several minutes.

Setting up the FTP server requires administrator privileges.

When the [User Account Control] dialog box is displayed, click [Yes].

It may take several minutes to set up the FTP server.

266 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Enable at application launch ([Start file transfer (AUTO) when launching the application])

You can set whether to start file transfers (AUTO) when the application is launched.
The [Start file transfer (AUTO) when launching the application] setting provides the following options:

 [Display confirmation messages]

Choose whether to start file transfer (AUTO) on a dialog box when the application detects an instrument
supported by the file transfer (AUTO) function at launch.

 [Start file transfer(AUTO) when launching the application]

Start automatic file transfers when the application detects an instrument supported by the LAN
automatic file transfer function at launch.

 [Do not start file transfer(AUTO) when launching the application]

Do not start file transfer(AUTO) when launching the application.

Change detailed settings

This section describes how to change detailed settings related to file transfer (AUTO).

1. Click the [Detailed settings] button on the [Common Settings]-[Console] dialog box.

2. The [File transfer (AUTO) – Detailed settings] dialog box will be displayed.
Configure the settings shown below.

267 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Setting when exiting the application ([File transfer(AUTO) when exiting application])

You can set whether to disable file transfer (AUTO) when closing the application. The [File transfer(AUTO)
when exiting application] setting provides the following options:

 [Stop file transfer(AUTO)]

Exit the application after stopping LAN automatic file transfers for all instruments.
*Disabling LAN automatic file transfers while measurement is in progress will stop measurement and
transfer any files created up to that point in time. It may take several minutes for the application to
close depending on file size and communications status.

 [Do not stop file transfer(AUTO)]

Exit the application without stopping LAN automatic file transfers for instruments.

Display of confirmation dialog boxes before configuring instruments ([Confirmation when starting file
transfer(AUTO)])

You can set whether a confirmation dialog box will be displayed when starting or stopping file
transfer(AUTO). The [Confirmation when starting file transfer(AUTO)] setting provides the following
options:

 [Display confirmation messages]

Display a confirmation dialog box when starting or stopping file transfer(AUTO).

 [Do not display messages]

Do not display a confirmation dialog box when starting or stopping file transfer(AUTO).

268 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Instrument save settings

Enabling the file transfer (AUTO) function causes instruments to be configured with model-specific save
settings as follows:

Model Name Automatic save settings File save timing

PQ3100 (*1) POWER QUARITY •Recording interval: 1 sec. to 5 min. •When an event occurs as

ANALYZER •Recording start method: Repeat, 2000- defined by conditions set with

01-01 instrument

•Recording stop method: Repeat, 2079- •Daily at 00:00

12-31 •When measurement stops

•Recording time period: 00:00 to 24:00 •When the time-axis file

•Delete file after FTP transfer: ON reaches 20 MB

•Folder/file name setting: Automatic

PQ3198 (*2) POWER QUARITY •Actual time control: Exactly •Daily at 00:00

ANALYZER •Repeat recording: 1 day •When measurement stops

•Start time: 00:00; end time: 00:00 (Files cannot be sent while an

•Repeat count: Unlimited (configurable event is occurring.)

only in GENNECT)

•Delete file after FTP transfer: ON

•Folder/file name setting: Automatic

PW3360, PW3365 (*3) CLAMP ON POWER •Recording measurement start method: •When an event occurs as

LOGGER Repeat defined by conditions set with

•Recording repeat interval: 2000-01-01 instrument

to 2079-12-31 •Daily at 00:00

•Recording repeat time: 00:00 to 24:00 •When measurement stops

•Delete file after FTP transfer: ON •When the time-axis file

・When folder division is OFF, change it reaches 20 MB

to DAY.

•Save file/folder name: AUTO-NAME

PW8001 POWER ANALYZER ・Auto-save operation: ON ・When measurement stops

・Delete files after upload: ON ・When [DATA RESET]

・Manual save settings - Save to FTP ・When the file size reaches

server: OFF 500MB

When waveform is saved

When saving a setting file

When saving a screen copy

(*Manually saved

measurement data is not

269 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

compatible with File Transfer

(AUTO).

LR8400,LR8401,LR8402 MEMORY HiLOGGER •Recording time setting: Continuous •When the time set as the

LR8410 WIRELESS LOGGING recording segmented save time is

STATION •Automatic save setting: Waveform or reached

CSV (numerical files not supported) •When measurement stops

•Delete save: ON

•Segmented save: ON*/regular

*Changes as follows:

Segmented save: Regular

Segment time: 1 day

Reference time: 00:00

LR8450, LR8450-01 MEMORY HiLOGGER •Recording time setting: Continuous •When the time set as the

recording segmented save time is

•Automatic save setting: Waveform or reached

CSV (numerical files not supported) or •When measurement stops

MDF format

•Delete save: ON

•Segmented save: ON*

*Changes as follows:

Segment time: 1 day

Reference time: Start time

[Automatic FTP data transmission

settings]

・Connection protection: OFF

・Delete sent file：ON

MR6000 MEMORY HiCORDER •Real-time saving: OFF •When measurement

•Delete save: ON* completes according to the

*Changes as follows when the automatic instrument’s setting conditions

save setting target is disabled: using the automatic save

Waveform save: ON function

Save type: Binary (Automatic transfer of files

Save method: Delete generated by real-time saving

File segments: 64 MB is not supported.)

•Segmented save setting

If 0 when setting is binary: Changes to

64.

If 0 when setting is text: Changes to

1000000.

270 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

•Save filename: AUTO

*1: Starting from GENNECT One v5.40, the PQ3100 will start file transfer without changing the auto save setting in the
following cases
・ When the recording start method is "Time specified" and the recording stop method is "Manual".
・ When the recording start method is "Repeat".
The " Folder/file name setting " will be changed to "automatic" even in the above settings.
*2: Starting from GENNECT One v5.40, PQ3198 will start file transfer without changing the auto save setting in the
following cases
・ When the Time Start is set to "Exactly" and Repeat Record is set to "1 day".
・ When the Time Start is set to "Time" and the Repeat Record is "OFF" or "1 day".
*3: Starting from GENNECT One v5.40, PW3360 and PW3365 will start file transfer without changing the auto save
setting in the following cases.
・ When the recording start method is "TIME" and the recording stop method is "MANUAL".
・ When the recording start method is "REPEAT".

List of error codes

In the event you are unable to configure setting when starting file transfer (AUTO) , refer to the
corresponding error code and message and configure the setting manually.

Error code Message Solution (manual setting) *Requires administrator privileges.

001 Failed to create FTP user. •Right-click [Local Users and Groups] under [Control Panel]-[System and

Security]-[Administrative Tools]-[Computer Management]-[System Tools]

and select [New User].

Username: ONE_FTP

Password: P@SSW0RD00

•Deselect the [User must change password at next logon] checkbox.

•Deselect the [Password never expires] checkbox.

002 Failed to set FTP user •[Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-[Computer

password. Management]-[System Tools]-[Local Users and Groups]

—If ONE_FTP does not exist, refer to the solution for error 001 to create

the user.

—If ONE_FTP exists, right-click and select the [Password never expires]

checkbox.

003 Failed to change FTP user •[Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-[Computer

settings. Management]-[System Tools]-[Local Users and Groups]

—If ONE_FTP does not exist, refer to the solution for error 001 to create

the user.

•Right-click on ONE_FTP and select [Users] under [Properties]-[Group]

and select [Delete]. Verify that [Users] has been deleted and click [OK].

004 Failed to change FTP folder •Go to the GENNECT One installation path (default path: C:¥Program

settings. Files (x86)¥HIOKI¥HIOKI GENNECT Cross¥FTP) and right-click on the

“hioki_one_ftp” folder.

•Select [Properties]-[Edit].

•If there is no ONE_FTP group or user name, select [Add], enter

[ONE_FTP] under [Enter name of selected object], and click [OK].

271 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

•Select ONE_FTP and select the [Full control] checkbox under

[Permissions].

005 Failed to configure •Select the receive rule and then select [New Rule] under [Control Panel]-

Windows Firewall (for FTP [System and Security]-[Windows Firewall]-[Advanced Settings].

use). Rule type: [Port]

Protocol: [TCP]

Target: [Specific local port], [21]

Operation: [Allow the connections]

Profile application: [Domain], [Private], [Public] (select all three)

Name: [GENNECT One] and [Complete]

006 Failed to configure •Select the receive rule and then select [New Rule] under [Control Panel]-

Windows Firewall (for [System and Security]-[Windows Firewall]-[Advanced Settings].

PASV mode use). Rule type: [Port]

Protocol: [TCP]

Target: [Specific local port], [65000 to 65020]

Operation: [Allow connections]

Profile application: [Domain], [Private], [Public] (select all three)

Name: [GENNECT One (PASV)] and [Complete]

007 Failed to set the config •If the FTP server has not yet been installed, set after successfully

folder. installing the FTP server (refer to error code 101 below).

•Double-click “C:¥Windows¥System32¥inetsrv¥config.”

(If an access permission dialog box is displayed, click [Continue].)

•Right-click the “config” folder and select [Properties]-[Security]-[Edit].

•If “Everyone” is not included as a group or user name, select [Add].

•Enter [Everyone] under [Enter name of selected object], and click [OK].

•Select [Everyone] and select the [Full control] checkbox under

[Permissions].

(If a security dialog box is displayed, click [Yes].)

101 Failed to deploy the FTP •Select [Control Panel]-[Programs and Functions]-[Enable or Disable

server. Windows Functionality].

•Select the [FTP Server], [FTP Service], [Web Management Tools], and [IIS

Management Console] checkboxes under [Internet Information Services]

and click [OK].

102 Failed to set up the FTP •Select [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Select [Site] and then choose [Add FTP site].

•Set the FTP site name to “one.hioki.co.jp,” the physical path to

“<GENNECT One installation path>¥hioki_one_ftp” (default path:

272 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

C:¥Program Files (x86)¥HIOKI¥HIOKI GENNECT

Cross¥FTP¥hioki_one_ftp) and click [Next].

•Set SSL to [Enable] (the default setting is not enabled) and click [Next].

•Set authentication to [Basic] and access permissions to [Specified users].

Specify [ONE_FTP], select both the [Read] and [Write] checkboxes, and

click [Finish].

103 Failed to set the FTP •Select [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server folder. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [Manage FTP

site/advanced settings].

•Set the physical path to “<GENNECT One installation

path>¥hioki_one_ftp” (default path: C:¥Program Files

(x86)¥HIOKI¥HIOKI GENNECT Cross¥FTP¥hioki_one_ftp) and click

[OK].

104 Failed to configure SSL •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

connections for the FTP [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

server. •Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [FTP SSL

settings].

•Select the [Allow SSL connections] checkbox as the SSL policy and click

[Apply].

105 Failed to enable FTP server •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

connections. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [FTP Ipv4

address and domain restrictions].

•Click [Edit function settings], set [Access to unidentifiable clients] to

[Allow], and click [OK].

106 Failed to configure FTP •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server authentication. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [FTP

authentication].

•Click [Basic authentication] and then click [Enable].

107 Failed to configure FTP •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server authentication rules. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [FTP approval

rules].

•Click [Add permission rule] and select the [Specified users] checkbox.

Enter[ONE_FTP], select both the [Read] and [Write] access privilege

checkboxes, and click [OK].

273 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

108 Failed to set the FTP •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server’s firewall port. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Click the local host at the top of the connections and then double-click

[FTP firewall support].

•Enter [65000-65020] as the [Data channel port range] and click [Apply].

109 Failed to set the FTP •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server’s firewall IP address. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [FTP firewall

support].

Enter the PC’s IP address in the [Firewall’s external IP address] field and

click [Apply].

110 Failed to set the FTP •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server’s log fields. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [FTP log].

•Click [Select W3C fields]. Select the [Date], [Time], [Client IP address (c-

ip)], [Method (cs-method)], and [Full path (x-fullpath)] checkboxes and click

[Apply].

111 Failed to set the FTP •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

server’s log save folder. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Expand [Sites], right-click on [one.hioki.co.jp], and select [FTP log].

•Click [Browse] under [Directory] and select [<GENNECT One installation

path>¥ftpLog] (default path: C:¥Program Files (x86)¥HIOKI¥HIOKI

GENNECT Cross¥FTP¥ftpLog) (if folder does not exist, add it by clicking

[New folder]) and click [Apply].

201 Communications ports are •Select [Receive rules] under [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-

limited by Windows [Windows Firewall]-[Advanced Settings].

Firewall. •Disable the rule restricting port numbers 21 and 65000 through 65020.

301 Unable to communicate •Launch [Control Panel]-[System and Security]-[Administrative Tools]-

with the FTP server. [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager].

•Select [Sites]. Select sites whose status is shown as [Started (ftp)] and

then click [Stop]. Select [one.hioki.jp] and click [Start].

274 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Control an instrument (Remote control [LAN])

•LAN remote control provides functionality for controlling an instrument using the instrument’s HTTP
server function.
•Other functions cannot be used while an instrument is being remote-controlled.

Supported instruments
・The LAN remote control function supports the following instruments:
Model number Name Supported URL

versions
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6387
PQ3100 POWER QUARITY V2.30 or later

ANALYZER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6503
PQ3198 POWER QUARITY V1.10 or later

ANALYZER
https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/single-
PW3335 POWER METER V1.11 or later
phase-ac-dc/id_5831
https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-
PW3336 POWER METER V1.23 or later
meters/3phase-ac-dc/id_5805
https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-
PW3337 POWER METER V1.23 or later
meters/3phase-ac-dc/id_5929
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5589
PW3360 CLAMP ON POWER V3.20 or later

LOGGER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5565
PW3365 CLAMP ON POWER V2.10 or later

LOGGER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6413
PW3390 POWER ANALYZER V2.00 or later
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5796
PW6001 POWER ANALYZER V3.02 or later
https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/power-
PW8001 POWER ANALYZER V1.00 or later
analyzer/id_412384
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5613
※LR8400,LR8401,LR8402 MEMORY V1.28 or later

HiLOGGER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5697
※LR8410 WIRELESS V1.42 or later

LOGGING STATION
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6535
LR8450, LR8450-01 MEMORY V1.20 or later

HiLOGGER
https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6439
MR6000 MEMORY V2.10 or later

HiCORDER

*In order to use the remote control function with an instrument such as the Data Logger LR8400 that uses
Java™, you will need to install Java™ on your PC and register the instrument as an exception in your
browser. For more information, see the page describing Java™ settings.
 Configure JavaTM on your computer

Limitations
Limitations on LAN remote control
Aspect of function’s operation Limitation Remarks

Communications interface LAN

275 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Limitations on communications
Aspect of function’s operation Limitation Remarks

Interface LAN

Automatic search network □.□.□.2 – □.□.□.254

scope *Limited to same network scope as computer.

DHCP Not supported

Using the function

Connect the instrument and PC with a LAN cable (p.17)

Start remote control (p.276)

Start remote control

1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

2. Select the [LAN] navigation bar.

3. Click the [LAN remote control] button（ ）.

4. The [Remote Control] screen will open, allowing you to control the instrument.

276 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. If the instrument screen is not displayed, click the [Refresh] button on the top of the screen several
times.
*Other functions cannot be used while the remote control window is open.

277 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Synchronize Instrument Clocks [LAN]

•This section describes how to synchronize instrument clocks.
•For more detailed information about the specific manner in which this feature operates for individual
instrument models, see [Synchronizing Instrument Clocks: Details].
•If you synchronize an instrument’s clock while it is recording or integrating values, there may be a blank
interval in the recorded measurement data. It is recommended to stop recording and integration before
synchronizing an instrument's clock.

Supported instruments
•Functionality for synchronizing instrument clocks supports the following instruments:
Model name Product name Firmware URL

version

PQ3100 POWER QUARITY Ver. 2.30 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6387

ANALYZER later

PQ3198 POWER QUARITY Ver. 1.10 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6503

ANALYZER later

PW3360 CLAMP ON POWER Ver. 3.20 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5589

LOGGER later

PW3365 CLAMP ON POWER Ver. 2.10 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5565

LOGGER later

PW3390 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 2.00 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6413

later

PW6001 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 3.02 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5796

later

PW8001 *1 *2 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 1.00 https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-meters/power-

or later analyzer/id_412384

LR8400, LR8401, MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 1.28 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5613

LR8402 later

LR8410 WIRELESS LOGGING Ver. 1.42 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=5697

STATION later

LR8450 MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 1.20 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6535

later

MR6000 MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 2.12 or https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6439

later
ST5680 DC HIPOT TESTER V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/electrical-safety-
Later testers/hipot/id_1265574
RM3545A RESISTANCE METER V1.00 or https://www.hioki.com/global/products/resistance-
Later meters/resistance/id_1266279

*1. All of the integrated data of the measurement instrument is reset by setting the instrument clock with this feature. It is
recommended to use this feature after the recording and analysis of the integration data has been completed (Data reset state).
*2 This function is not executed when the connection-specific integration or time control function (actual time, timer) is enabled.

278 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Instructions (synchronizing the time from the [Console] tab)

·Manually set the clock of the instrument registered in the [Console] tab to the PC time.
·See below for more information.
 Synchronizing Instrument Clocks: Details

1. To specify an instrument and set its clock

-1. Select the [Console] tab.
-2. Right-click the instrument whose clock you wish to set.
-3. Select [Set clock to this instrument] in the menu.

-4. When the confirmation message is displayed, click the [OK] button.

-5. The instrument’s clock will be synchronized with the computer’s clock.

2. To synchronize all connected instruments’ clocks

-1. Select the [Console] tab.
-2. Right-click on the instrument list.
-3. Select [Set clock to all instruments] in the menu.

-4. When the confirmation message is displayed, click the [OK] button.

-5. All connected instruments’ clocks will be synchronized with the computer’s clock.

279 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Instructions (configuring automatic time synchronization)

·This section describes how to synchronize the clocks of instruments registered on the [Console] tab to a
PC daily at a user-specified time.
·Instrument times will not be synchronized after you exit GENNECT One.
·Depending on the instrument model and firmware version, synchronizing the time may cause
measurement or integration to stop. In this case, a new file will be created when the time is
synchronized.
·See below for more information.
 Synchronizing Instrument Clocks: Details

1. Register the instrument on the [Console] tab.

-1. Select the [Console] tab.
-2. Click [Search for Instrument] or enter the instrument's IP address and register it.
*If registering the instrument for the first time, you will need to select the instrument corresponding to the
IP address from the drop-down menu.

2. Configure automatic time synchronization.

-1. Click the [Settings] button ( ) at the top left.

-2. The [Console] tab on the [Common Settings] dialog box will be displayed.

280 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

-3. Select [Synchronize instrument clocks] under [Instrument clock synchronization (automatic, forced)]
and set the time.

-4. When the confirmation message is displayed, click the [OK] button.

-5. While GENNECT One is running, the clocks of the instruments registered on the HIOKI GENNECT
One [Console] tab will be synchronized daily at the specified time.

281 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Synchronizing Instrument Clocks: Details

This section describes how individual instruments’ clocks are set. The delay introduced by LAN
communications is not taken into account when setting instruments’ clocks.

Model Name Detailed clock synchronization operation

PQ3100 POWER QUARITY Reference time: Computer time

ANALYZER Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:ss.000”

Operation [Ver. 2.10]

during If the instrument is recording, recording is

recording: stopped when the clock is set and then restarted.

[Ver. 2.20 or later]

The clock is set without stopping recording, even if

the instrument is recording. (*1) (*2)

PQ3198 POWER QUARITY Reference time: Computer time

ANALYZER Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:ss.000”

Operation The clock is set without stopping recording, even if

during the instrument is recording. (*1) (*3)

recording:

PW3360 CLAMP ON POWER Reference time: Computer time

LOGGER Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:ss.000”

Operation [Ver. 3.20 and later]

during If the instrument is recording, recording is

recording: stopped when the clock is set and then restarted.

[Ver. 3.21 or later]

The clock is set without stopping recording, even if

the instrument is recording. (*1) (*4)

PW3365 CLAMP ON POWER Reference time: Computer time

LOGGER Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:ss.000”

Operation [Ver. 2.00 or earlier]

during If the instrument is recording, recording is

recording: stopped when the clock is set and then restarted.

[Ver. 2.10 or later]

The clock is set without stopping recording, even if

the instrument is recording. (*1) (*4)

PW3390 POWER ANALYZER Reference time: Computer time

Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:00” (*5)

282 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Operation If the instrument is integrating values,

during integration is stopped when the clock is set and

recording: then restarted.

PW6001 POWER ANALYZER Reference time: Computer time

PW8001 Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:ss.000”

Operation If the instrument is integrating values,

during integration is stopped when the clock is set and

recording: then restarted.

LR8400, LR8401, MEMORY HiLOGGER Reference time: Computer time

LR8402, Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:ss.000”

LR8450, LR8450-01 Operation If the instrument is recording, recording is

LR8410 WIRELESS LOGGING during stopped when the clock is set and then restarted.

STATION recording:

MR6000 MEMORY HiCORDER Reference time: Computer time

Timing: When the reference time reaches “hh:mm:ss.000”

Operation If the instrument is recording, recording is

during stopped when the clock is set and then restarted.

recording:

(*1) If the reference time and instrument time differ by more than the recording interval, there may be a blank interval in the
recording data. It is recommended to stop recording before synchronizing an instrument's clock.
(*2) Recording may stop and then restart when setting the clock in the following circumstances:
-If the instrument is in the event IN, KEEP, or OUT state, or if the instrument is saving fluctuation data
-If the interval save time is set to 150 or 180 cycles
-If flicker is set to any value other than OFF
-If the reference time and instrument time differ by more than 5 min.
(*3) Recording may stop and then restart when setting the clock in the following circumstances:
-If the instrument is in the event IN, KEEP, or OUT state, or if the instrument is saving fluctuation data
-If the reference time and instrument time differ by more than 1 min.
(*4) Recording may stop and then restart when setting the clock in the following circumstances:
-If the reference time and instrument time differ by more than 5 min.
(*5) Setting the clock may result in a wait time of up to 1 min. as the system waits until XX:XX:00 to set the clock.

283 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Application settings
Configure the common settings

Configure the settings for CSV Export

This section describes how to perform the settings of the decimal symbol and the list separator symbol that is
used when data is exported as CSV.

1. Select [Settings]-[Application] in the menu.

2. [Select Type] window is displayed. Click [Start] button, after selecting [Common Settings].

284 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. The [CSV Output] tab on the [Common Settings] dialog box will be displayed.

Item Description
Common Decimal point symbol Sets the decimal point symbol to use for numerical
values output to CSV files.
Period (“.”)
Comma (“,”)
Data separator Sets the character to use as a delimiter in CSV files.
symbol Comma (“,”)
Semicolon (“;”)
Logging Output format Sets the CSV output format to use for logging data.
Logging format
Time-series data format
Number of decimal Sets the number of decimal places to use for
places measured values being output to logging data CSV
files.
Channel display Sets the Channel display names in CSV files.
names CH + number：Outputs the channel display name in
the format “CH 1,” “CH 2,” “CH 3,” etc.
The numbers are the same as those used in
[Channel information].
ID Name：Outputs the channel-specific ID as the
channel display name.
Examples: Urms1
ID Name + Model#Serial number：Outputs the
channel-specific ID + Model#Serial numberas the
channel display name.
Examples: Urms1-PW8001-12#230312345
Time-series Output format Displays the CSV output format for time-series
measurement data data.
Time-series data format

285 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Time axis format Sets the display format for time stamps in time-
series data.
Absolute time
Relative time
Relative time display Sets the time display format to use when the time-
format series axis format has been set to [Relative time].
Automatic
s (seconds)
point
Relative time Sets the reference position for displaying 0s when
the time axis format is "relative time".
Trigger position as 0s
The beginning as 0s
Data completion Specifies whether to complete measured values for
times for which there is no measurement data when
measurement parameters (channels) with different
interval times exist in the time-series data being
output to a CSV file.
None: Do not complete measured values for times
for which there is no measurement data.
Complete using last measured value: Complete
measured values for times for which there is no
measurement data using the last measured value.
Data thinning Specifies whether to thin intermediate data points
when outputting time-series data to a CSV file.
Example:
1: No data thinning
2: Output 1 point for every 2 points. 3: Output 1
point for every 3 points. ...
Number of decimal Specifies the number of decimal places to use for
places measured values for time-series data being output to
a CSV file.
*You can not select [,(Comma)] for both [Decimal Symbol] and [Separator Symbol].

See Output data in CSV/Image format for how to output measured data as CSV.

4. Click [OK] button.

Configure the setting for Version Up Notification

1. Check the [Notify the latest version available every time the application started] if you want to be
informed of the latest version available every time you start the application.

286 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring logging/dashboard settings

This section describes how to configure logging/dashboard settings.

Item Description
Order of instruments Model, serial Order instruments by model and then
number serial number when displaying them in
logging data.
Instrument list Order instruments as they are shown in
the instrument list when displaying them
in logging data.
Items that inherit the previous Checked and ON Channel display name, Channel display
settings when logging. color, Unit prefix、Display format,
Minimum resolution、Number of decimal
places
When each item is checked and turned ON,
logging is performed with the previous
settings inherited.
Unchecked and Channel display name, Channel display
OFF color, Unit prefix、Display format,
Minimum resolution、Number of decimal
places
When each item is unchecked and turned
OFF, logging is performed with the default
settings without inheriting the previous
settings.
Instrument stops when Not stop Stops logging without stopping the
measurement of the target instrument
logging stops (*1) when logging stops.
stop Stops the measurement of the target
instrument when logging stops and ends
logging.
Operation to search measuring No update When the selection screen for logging and
automatically other measurement devices is opened,
instruments automatic search for measurement devices
is not performed.
Update Automatic search for measuring
automatically instruments is performed when the
selection screen for logging and other

287 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

measuring instruments is opened.

*1: Specify the stop operation other than when the [Stop Logging] button at the bottom left of the logging
viewer is pressed.
For the stop operation when the [Stop logging] button is pressed, select the operation in the message
displayed when the [Stop logging] button is pressed.

Configure the settings for battery tester

Manage Threshold

Here explains how to create/edit/delete the threshold or profile table without USB communication with
Battery Tester.

1. Select [Settings]-[Application] in the menu.

2. [Select Type] window is displayed. Click [Start] button, after selecting [Battery].

288 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

3. [Settings on Battery Tester] window is displayed.

4. Select [Manage Threshold] to create/edit/delete the threshold table.

*See below for how to manage the threshold.

 C REATE THE NEW THRESHOLD TABLE

 EDIT THE THRESHOLD TABLE
 DELETE THE THRESHOLD TABLE

289 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

5. Select [Manage Profile] to create/edit/delete the profile table.

*See below for how to manage the profile.

 C REATE THE NEW PROFILE TABLE (BT3554-50)

 EDIT THE PROFILE TABLE (BT3554-50)
 DELETE THE PROFILE TABLE (BT3554-50)

290 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Linking GENNECT One to GENNECT Cloud

GENNECT Cloud is a dedicated cloud service operated by HIOKI.
By using this application with GENNECT Cloud, you can remotely monitor or operate (Remote monitoring
mode) instruments connected to a computer and share files with another user in your account.
For more information, see the following:
 GENNECT Cloud - GENNECT One

*To link GENNECT One to GENNECT Cloud, you’ll need the following:
 Internet connectivity for your PC
 A GENNECT Cloud account
If you don’t have an account, please create one.
 Preparing to Use GENNECT Cloud
 The ability to receive email
Please enable your email client to receive messages from the @mail.gennect.net (if you are outside of
China) or @mail.gennect.cn (if you are inside of China) domain.

About Internet Connection

An Internet connection is required to use the functions linking GENNECT Cloud. Before using this function,
please make sure that the PC on which this application is installed is connected to the Internet.

Note
If your network has access restrictions, some of the functions may not be available. Please consult your network
administrator and consider removing the restriction.

Network requirements for lines used for GENNECT One

If you are using GENNECT Cloud outside of China

Function Name Network Destination Network Requirements

(Domain)
Check or download the Application Server [HTTPS]
latest installer. (app.hioki.com) Communication using outbound TCP:443 port is
permitted (*1) (*2).
Login, File Sharing GENNECT Cloud [HTTPS]
(cloud.gennect.net) Communication using outbound TCP:443 port is
(app.gennect.net) permitted (*1) (*2).
Remote monitoring AWS IoT Core [MQTTS]
mode (iot.cloud.gennect.net) Communication using outbound TCP:443 port and
TLS intercommunication is allowed to AWS IoT
Core (iot.cloud.gennect.net) (*1). No TLS
decryption is performed on the route (*3).
Remote control of (cloud-relay.gennect.net) [SSH]
instruments (Console Communication using outbound TCP:443 port is
function) allowed to cloud-relay.gennect.net (*1).

If you are using GENNECT Cloud in China

Function Name Network Destination Network Requirements

(Domain)
Check or download the Application Server [HTTPS]
latest installer. (one.gennect.cn) Communication using outbound TCP:443 port is
permitted (*1) (*2).
Login, File Sharing GENNECT Cloud [HTTPS]

291 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

(gennect.cn) Communication using outbound TCP:443 port is

(app.gennect.net) permitted (*1) (*2).
Remote monitoring AWS IoT Core [MQTTS]
mode (iot.cloud.gennect.cn) Communication using outbound TCP:443 port and
TLS intercommunication is allowed to AWS IoT
Core (iot.cloud.gennect.cn) (*1). No TLS decryption
is performed on the route (*3).
Remote control of (cloud-relay.gennect.cn) [SSH]
instruments (Console Communication using outbound TCP:443 port is
function) allowed to cloud-relay.gennect.cn (*1).

(*1) Permit access to this domain if there are access restrictions by filtering software or other means.
(*2) Permit file downloads and uploads to this domain if there are restrictions on file downloads and uploads.
(*3) If TLS decryption traffic detection is in place on the path of your network, configure this domain to allow
communication without TLS decryption (use of allow rules with Server Name Indication (SNI) is recommended).

Preparing to Use GENNECT Cloud

GENNECT Cloud offers four plans: Free, Standard, Pro, and Trial. The Free and Trial plans are both free of
charge. Standard and Pro plans are fee-based.
See below for more information about available plans.
 GENNECT Cloud license plans
The procedure for creating a user account differs for the Trial plan and the other plans.

To use the GENNECT Cloud Free, Standard, or Pro plan

Access the GENNECT Cloud website to create an account.

If you are using the GENNECT Cloud integration function outside of China, please access
https://cloud.gennect.net/app/ , if you are using it in China, please access https://gennect.cn/app/.

Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud online help for details.

https://www.gennect.net/en/cloud/manual/1-2

To use the GENNECT Cloud Trial plan

This application is used to create users for GENNECT Cloud Trial plan accounts.

1. Click the [Log In] button at the top right of the application window.
2. The [Log in to GENNECT Cloud] window will be displayed. Click [Create a trial user].

3. The [Create a trial user] window will be displayed.

292 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

① Enter an email address and select your country (*1). Review the Terms of User and Privacy Policy
and select the [Accept Terms of User / Privacy Policy] checkbox. Click [Issue authentication code]. A
6-digit authentication code will be sent to the email address you entered.
(*1) Select [Global] if you use the GENNECT Cloud integration function outside of China, or [China]
if you use it within China.
② Enter the authentication code and click [Authenticate].
Click [Reissue authentication code] to send another authentication code to the email address you
entered.
③ Set a password.
Enter a password that is at least 8 characters in length. Passwords may include single-byte
numerals, English uppercase letters, and English lowercase letters. Enter the same password again
in the [Enter again] field and click [Set password].

4. Once the user has been created, the message [The trial user was created.] will be displayed.
To log in to GENNECT Cloud using the newly created Trial user, click [OK].

Logging In to GENNECT Cloud

*If you don’t have a GENNECT Cloud account, please create one first.
 Preparing to Use GENNECT Cloud

1. Launch GENNECT One.

2. Click the [Log In] button at the top right of the application window. The [Log in to GENNECT Cloud]
window will open.

293 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

If you’re using a GENNECT Cloud Free, Standard, or Pro plan

Enter your [Account ID], [User ID], and [Password] and click the [Log In] button.
If the login is successful, the message [You've logged in.] will be displayed.

If you’re using the GENNECT Cloud Trial plan

1. Click [Log in as trial user] on the [Log in to GENNECT Cloud] window.

2. The [Log in as a trial user] window will be displayed. Enter the [Email address] and [Password] you
used to create the trial user and then click the [Log In] button.
If the login is successful, the message [You've logged in.] will be displayed.

If you’ve enabled two-factor authentication

If you’ve enabled two-factor authentication, a window asking you to enter an authentication code will be
displayed.

294 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

 If you’ve enabled two-factor authentication using email:

Enter the authentication code that was sent to the email address you registered and click
[Authenticate].

 If you’ve enabled two-factor authentication using an app:

Enter the authentication code displayed by the two-factor authentication app you're using (Authy, etc.)
and click [Authenticate].

For more information about how to enable two-factor authentication, please see the GENNECT Cloud
online help.
 (Application) Enabling two-factor authentication for a user | GENNECT Cloud
https://www.gennect.net/en/cloud/manual/10-3

Saving/deleting login information

You can save the information needed to log in to GENNECT Cloud (account ID and user ID) in the
application. If you save your login information, you can eliminate the need to enter your account ID and
user ID the next time you log in.

Saving login information

1. Log in with the [Save login information] checkbox selected on the [Logging In to GENNECT Cloud]
window. Once you’ve successfully logged in, your user information (account ID, user ID, user icon, and
username) will be saved in the application.

Using saved login information

1. Click [Saved login information] on the [Log in to GENNECT Cloud] window.

2. A list of saved login information will be displayed. Select the login information you wish to use and
click [Select].

295 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Deleting saved login information

1. Click [Saved login information] on the [Log in to GENNECT Cloud] window.

2. A list of saved login information will be displayed. Select the login information you wish to delete and
click [Delete].

Obtaining a New Password

An email including a link for obtaining a new password will be sent to the email address you registered
with GENNECT Cloud. You can set a new password by following the URL for obtaining a new password.
*To obtain a new password for a user who has not registered an email address, please contact your account
administrator.

1. Click [If you’ve forgotten your password] on the [Log in to GENNECT Cloud] or [Log in as trial user]
window.
2. When the [Obtaining a new password] window opens, enter the email address you registered and click
[Send message].
3. The message will be sent to the email address you entered. Follow the instructions on the web page
accessed via the URL in the email to set a new password.

296 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

297 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Sharing and Managing Data with GENNECT Cloud

By logging in to GENNECT Cloud (*1), you can link GENNECT One to GENNET Cloud together to share
and manage measurement data among multiple users.

The application can be used with GENNECT Cloud to provide the following data sharing and management
functionality:
・ Sharing measurement files on a local PC by uploading them to the cloud
・ Downloading measurement files from the cloud to a local PC
・ Opening measurement files stored in the cloud via GENNECT One
・ Outputting measurement files stored in the cloud on a local PC
・ Sharing logging data automatically output by the logging and dashboard functionality by automatically
uploading it to the cloud (*2)
・ Upload and share threshold and profile information of battery testers BT3554, BT3554-01 and BT3554-
50 on the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro plans)

*1: For more information about how to log in to GENNECT Cloud from GENNECT One, see the following:
 Logging In to GENNECT Cloud
*2: Automatic uploading of logging data will stop if the upper limit on cloud storage space is reached. It is recommended
to use this function with a GENNECT Cloud Standard or better plan.
For more information about the GENNECT Cloud storage space allowance for each plan, see the following:
 GENNECT Cloud license plans
For more information about how to enable automatic uploading of logging data, see the following:
 [Logging data] tab

Limitations
Limitations by GENNECT Cloud plan
Item Limitation Remarks
Number of users GENNECT Cloud plan: Number of users Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud
Trial: 1 online help for details.
Free: 3
Standard: 10
Pro: 100
Storage space GENNECT Cloud plan: Storage space Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud
Trial: 512 MB online help for details.
Free: 5 GB
Standard: 50 GB
Pro: 500 GB
Number of GENNECT Cloud plan: Number of measurement groups Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud
measurement groups Trial: 1 online help for details.
Free: 1
Standard: 10
Pro: 100
Number of file shares GENNECT Cloud plan: Number of file shares This feature is only available on
-Battery Threshold, Standard: 30 GENNECT Cloud Standard or Pro
-Battery profile Pro: 100 plans.
information For more information on this feature,
please refer to the following
 Share and manage battery
tester threshold and profile
information in the cloud
(GENNECT Cloud
Standard / Pro plans)

298 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Window layout (overall)

Once Logging In to GENNECT Cloud, the [Data] tab will show the following information.
This section describes the name and functionality of each part of the data list window.

③List controls area

① Folder selection area ② Data list display area

⑤Function button are ④ Information display area

Name Functionality
①Folder selection area Selects the folder level for measurement data stored in GENNECT Cloud. Select a
folder level to change the content shown in the data list display area.
For more information, see the following:
 Window layout and functionality (①Folder selection area)
②Data list display area Displays a list of measurement data linked to GENNECT Cloud. The data list includes
the following information: status, which indicates the upload state; data type; file size;
and instrument model. You can also edit the data title, comment, and tags.
For more information, see the following:
 Window layout and functionality (②Data list)
③List controls area Allows you to perform operations including updating the data list, changing the
measurement group, and manipulating folders.
For more information, see the following:
 Window layout and functionality (③List controls area)
④Information display Displays detailed information about the measurement data selected in the data list
area along with image file thumbnails.
For more information, see the following:
 Display layout and functionality (④Information display area)
⑤Function button area Provides operations for linking GENNECT Cloud with data, including uploading,
downloading, and deleting measurement files.
For more information, see the following:
 Display layout and functionality (⑤Function button area）

299 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Window layout and functionality (①Folder selection area)

When you log in to GENNECT Cloud, you can switch the display between two types of data list.

Folder selection area (local)

Select a folder to display a list of measurement data saved on the local

PC in the data list display area.
While you’re logged in, you can upload measurement files that exist
only on the local PC to GENNECT Cloud.

“Expand” buttons

Expands the folder selection area (local).

Expands the folder selection area (cloud).

Folder selection area (cloud)

Select a folder to display a list of measurement data linked to

GENNECT Cloud in the data list display area.

Switching between cloud and local data lists

Name Functionality
Data list (local) Select the folder tree labeled [Local] to display a list of measurement data saved on the
local PC. If you’re logged in to GENNECT Cloud, you can click the [Upload] button to
upload measurement data saved only on the local PC. Uploaded measurement data can
be managed using the GENNECT Cloud drive window or the GENNECT One data list
(cloud).

Data list (cloud) Select the folder tree labeled [Cloud] to display a list of measurement data linked to
GENNECT Cloud. This data list allows you to view and manage measurement data
that has been shared with other users in the same account.

300 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Window layout and functionality (①Data list)

The data list (cloud) consists of a list of measurement data linked to GENNECT Cloud.

Item Functionality
Checkbox Used to select measurement data when performing operations such as uploading,
downloading, outputting, or deleting data.

Status Displays a status icon indicating the status of the link between the measurement data
and GENNECT Cloud.
The following statuses are indicated:
Icon Description
[Full synchronization]
Files exist both in the cloud and in local storage, and measurement
data content is identical.
[Partial synchronization]
Files exist both in the cloud and in local storage, and measurement
data content differs. The status can be changed to [Full
synchronization] by either downloading changes in the cloud to the
[Data list (cloud)] or uploading changes in the [Data list (cloud)] to
the cloud.
[Not downloaded]
Files only exist in cloud storage.
Files stored in the cloud can be downloaded from GENNECT One.
[Not uploaded]
Files only exist in local storage.
Files from another user in the same account can be downloaded by
uploading files from GENNECT Cloud.
[Not uploaded (different terminal)]
Files only exist in the local storage of a different terminal.
This display is only generated when a remote GENNECT One session
(remote monitoring mode) or a GENNECT Remote gateway is
operating while configured to share only file attributes with the
cloud.
To download this file, you must first upload the file from the
GENNECT Cloud web application. Then the file can be downloaded
from GENNECT One.

Data type Displays the type of measurement data.

Creation time and date Indicates the time and date at which the measurement data was created, using the
local PC’s timezone.

Title Displays and allows editing of the title of the measurement data.
You can edit the comment by double-clicking the cell.

Comment Displays and allows editing of comments for the measurement data.
You can edit the comment by double-clicking the cell.

Tag Displays and allows editing of tags for the measurement data.
You can edit or select the tags by double-clicking the cell.

Size Displays the measurement data’s file size.

Model Displays the model of instrument related to the measurement data.

301 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Window layout and functionality (①List controls area)

Allows you to perform operations including updating the data list, changing the measurement group, and
manipulating folders.

Name Functionality
[Update] button Acquires information from GENNECT Cloud and updates the data list.

[Upload user file] button Uploads a user-specified file other than measurement data to GENNECT
Cloud.

[GENNECT Cloud] button Opens the GENNECT Cloud web application in a web browser.
Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud online help for details about the
GENNECT Cloud web application.
 GENNECT Cloud Manual
[Measurement group] selection drop- Selects the measurement group to display in the data list.
down menu By default, the [Default] measurement group is selected.
Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud online help for details about
measurement groups.
 GENNECT Cloud Manual
[Select all] button Selects all measurement data displayed in the data list.

[Clear all] button Deselects all measurement data displayed in the data list.

[Display only selected] button On: Displays only measurement data in the data list that has been
selected.
Off: Displays all measurement data in the data list, regardless of whether
it has been selected.

[Search] box Enter text to use as keywords for refining the measurement data shown in
the data list. If using multiple search words, separate them with single-
byte spaces. (OR condition)

[Search] button Displays only measurement data in the data list that partially matches
the text entered in the [Search] box.

[Filter] button On: This button will turn on when you click the [Search] button or display
a narrowed range of measurement data by changing the [Date], [Data
type], [Instrument model] drop-down menu.
Off: Displays measurement data after canceling all of the conditions used
to narrow the range of displayed data as described above.

[Date] selection drop-down menu All dates: Displays measurement data without narrowing it by date.
1 day: Displays measurement data after narrowing the range to data
whose update time and date fall within the last day.
1 week Displays measurement data after narrowing the range to data
whose update time and date falls within the last week.
1 month Displays measurement data after narrowing the range to data
whose update time and date fall within the last month.
Specified date: Displays measurement data after narrowing the range to
data from the specified interval.
By default, [All dates] is selected.

302 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

[Data type] selection drop-down Displays measurement data after narrowing the range based on the [Data
menu type].
By default, [All] is selected.

[Instrument model] selection drop- Displays measurement data after narrowing the range based on the
down menu [Instrument model].
By default, [All] is selected.

Display layout and functionality (①Information display area)

Displays detailed information about the measurement data selected in the data list. If the selected measurement data is
an image file, displays a thumbnail image.

303 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Display layout and functionality (①Function button area）

Provides operations for linking GENNECT Cloud with data, including uploading, downloading, and deleting
measurement files.
For more information about procedures for sharing and managing GENNECT One measurement data after linking it to
GENNECT Cloud, see the following:
 Creating links between GENNECT One and GENNECT Cloud measurement data
 Managing measurement data in the data list (cloud)

Name Functionality
[Open] button Opens the measurement data selected in the data list in GENNECT One.
If the measurement file does not exist on the local PC, it will be downloaded from
GENNECT Cloud.
For more information, see the following:
 Opening the measurement data in GENNECT One

[Output] button Outputs the measurement data selected in the data list to an external file. If the
measurement file does not exist on the local PC, it will be downloaded from
GENNECT Cloud and then output.
For more information, see the following:
 Outputting measurement data as a file

[Upload] button Uploads the measurement data selected in the data list to GENNECT Cloud.
For more information, see the following:
 Uploading measurement data to GENNECT Cloud

[Download] button Downloads the measurement data selected in the data list to GENNECT One from
GENNECT Cloud.
For more information, see the following:
 Downloading measurement data from GENNECT Cloud

[Delete] button Deletes the measurement data displayed in the data list after asking the user to select
the method of deletion.

Methods of Description
deletion
Delete only local Deletes only measurement data stored on the local PC. This
files method can be used to save local storage, since deleted
measurement data can be reacquired by downloading it
again.

Delete both local Completely deletes measurement data stored on the local PC
and cloud files as well as measurement data stored in GENNECT Cloud.

For more information, see the following:

 Deleting measurement data

304 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Creating links between GENNECT One and GENNECT Cloud measurement data

This section describes the procedure for creating links between GENNECT One and GENNECT Cloud
measurement data.

Uploading measurement data from the data list (local) to GENNECT Cloud

This section describes how to upload measurement data stored in the GENNECT One data list (local) to
GENNECT Cloud. Uploaded measurement data will be reflected on the GENNECT Cloud drive window and
in the GENNECT One data list (cloud), creating a data link with GENNECT Cloud. Measurement data for
which a data link has been created can be shared with other users in the same account.
1. Log in to GENNECT Cloud.
2. Open the data list (local).
3. Select measurement data in the data list (local) and click the [Upload] button.

4. A window asking you to confirm the measurement group and folder to which to upload the data will be
displayed. (*1)
Review the upload destination in GENNECT Cloud and click the [OK] button.

5. Wait for the upload to complete.

305 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

6. Measurement data uploaded to GENNECT Cloud will be reflected in the following and made available to be
shared with other users in the same account:
·GENNECT One data list (cloud) window
·GENNECT Cloud drive window

Note
*1: For more information about changing the destination measurement group and folder when uploading measurement

data from the data list (local), see the following:

 [Data list (local)] tab

306 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Managing measurement data in the data list (cloud)

This section describes how to view and manage (output, upload, download, and delete) measurement data that
has been shared within an account in the GENNECT One data list (cloud).

Opening the measurement data in GENNECT One

This section describes the procedure for opening measurement data that has been shared within an account in
the GENNECT One data list (cloud) in GENNECT One.
Status Operation

[Full synchronization] The measurement data saved in local storage will be opened in GENNECT One.

[Partial synchronization] A dialog box confirming whether you wish to download the measurement data

from GENNECT Cloud to your local storage will be displayed. (*2)

If you do not download the data:

The measurement data saved in local storage will be opened in GENNECT One.

If you download the data:

The measurement data downloaded from GENNECT Cloud to your local storage

will be opened in GENNECT One.

[Not downloaded] The measurement data downloaded from GENNECT Cloud to your local storage

will be opened in GENNECT One.

[Not uploaded] The measurement data saved in local storage will be opened in GENNECT One.

[Not uploaded (different The measurement data cannot be opened from GENNECT One. (*1)

terminal)]

1. Select measurement data in the data list (cloud) and click the [Open] button.

307 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. A viewer suited to the type of measurement data that you selected will open, allowing you to view the
measurement data. If the measurement file does not exist on the local PC, it will be downloaded from GENNECT Cloud.
(*1)(*2)

Note
*1: If the measurement file does not exist in GENNECT Cloud’s storage (if the status is either [Not uploaded] or [Not

uploaded (different terminal)]), it will not be possible to download the measurement file. You can download the file by

uploading it from either the GENNECT Cloud web application or a terminal that is linked to GENNECT Cloud.

*2: If you have selected measurement data for which measurement files with different content exist in GENNECT Cloud

storage and on the local PC (if the status is [Partial synchronization]), a message confirming whether you wish to update

the local PC file will be displayed. For more information about settings for changing this operation, see the following:

 [Data list (cloud)] tab

Outputting measurement data as a file

This section describes the procedure for outputting measurement data that has been shared within an
account in the GENNECT One data list (cloud) as a file.

Status Operation

[Full synchronization] The measurement data saved in local storage will be output from GENNECT One.

[Partial A dialog box confirming whether you wish to download the measurement data from

synchronization] GENNECT Cloud to your local storage will be displayed. (*3)

If you do not download the data:

The measurement data saved in local storage will be output from GENNECT One.

If you download the data:

The measurement data downloaded from GENNECT Cloud to your local storage

will be output from GENNECT One.

[Not downloaded] The measurement data downloaded from GENNECT Cloud to your local storage

will be output from GENNECT One.

[Not uploaded] The measurement data saved in local storage will be output from GENNECT One.

308 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

[Not uploaded (different The measurement data cannot be output from GENNECT One. (*2)

terminal)]

1. Select measurement data in the data list (cloud) and click the [Open] button.

2. Select the output format and click the [OK] button. (*1)

3. Specify the save destination and click the [OK] button. If the measurement file does not exist on the local
PC, it will be downloaded from GENNECT Cloud. (*2)(*3)

4. The measurement file will be saved to the specified save destination.

Note
*1: The CSV and image formats cannot be selected for some data types. For more information about the data types for

which outputting to the CSV format is supported, see the following:

 Output data in CSV/Image format

*2: If the measurement file does not exist in GENNECT Cloud’s storage (if the status is either [Not uploaded] or [Not

uploaded (different terminal)]), it will not be possible to download the measurement file.

*3: If you have selected measurement data for which measurement files with different content exist in GENNECT Cloud

storage and on the local PC (if the status is [Partial synchronization]), a message confirming whether you wish to update

the local PC file will be displayed. For more information about settings for changing this operation, see the following:

 [Data list (cloud)] tab

309 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Uploading measurement data to GENNECT Cloud

This section describes the procedure for uploading measurement data in the GENNECT One data list (cloud)
whose status is either [Not uploaded] or [Partial synchronization] to GENNECT Cloud.

Status Operation

[Full synchronization] The measurement data is up to date. The measurement data will not be uploaded.

(*1)

[Partial synchronization] A dialog box confirming whether you wish to upload measurement data from your

local storage to GENNECT Cloud will be displayed. (*3)

If you do not upload the data:

The measurement data will not be uploaded to GENNECT Cloud.

If you upload the data:

The measurement data will be uploaded to GENNECT Cloud.

[Not downloaded] The measurement data does not exist in your local storage. The measurement data

will not be uploaded. (*2)

[Not uploaded] The measurement data will be uploaded to GENNECT Cloud.

[Not uploaded (different The measurement data does not exist in your local storage. The measurement data

terminal)] will not be uploaded. (*2)

1. Select measurement data whose status is either [Not uploaded] or [Partial synchronization] in the data list
(cloud) and click the [Upload] button.

2. Wait for the upload to complete. (*1)(*2)

When the upload completes, the status of the measurement data will change to [Full synchronization].

Note

310 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

*1: Measurement data whose contents are identical to data files in GENNECT Cloud (with a status of [Full

synchronization]) will not be uploaded.

*2: If the measurement file does not exist in local storage (if the status is either [Not uploaded] or [Not uploaded (different

terminal)]), the measurement data will not be uploaded.

*3: If the measurement data consists of measurement files with different content in GENNECT Cloud storage and on the

local PC (if the status is [Partial synchronization]), a message confirming whether you wish to update the GENNECT

Cloud file will be displayed. For more information about settings for changing this operation, see the following:

 [Data list (cloud)] tab

Downloading measurement data from GENNECT Cloud

This section describes the procedure for downloading measurement data in the GENNECT One data list
(cloud) whose status is either [Partial synchronization] or [Not downloaded] from GENNECT Cloud to
GENNECT One.

Status Operation

[Full synchronization] The measurement data is up to date. The measurement data will not be

downloaded. (*1)

[Partial synchronization] A dialog box confirming whether you wish to download the measurement data from

GENNECT Cloud to your local storage will be displayed. (*3)

If you do not download the data:

The measurement data will not be downloaded.

If you download the data:

The measurement data will be downloaded from GENNECT Cloud to local storage.

[Not downloaded] The measurement data will be downloaded from GENNECT Cloud to local storage.

[Not uploaded] The measurement data does not exist in GENNECT Cloud storage. The

measurement data will not be downloaded. (*2)

[Not uploaded (different The measurement data cannot be downloaded from GENNECT One. (*2)

terminal)]

1. Select measurement data whose status is either [Partial synchronization] or [Not downloaded] in the data
list (cloud) and click the [Download] button.

311 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. Wait for the download to complete. (*1)(*2)

When the download completes, the status of the measurement data will change to [Full synchronization].

Note
*1: Measurement data whose contents are identical to data files in GENNECT Cloud (with a status of [Full

synchronization]) will not be downloaded.

*2: If the measurement file does not exist in GENNECT Cloud’s storage (if the status is either [Not uploaded] or [Not

uploaded (different terminal)]), it will not be possible to download the measurement file. You can download the file by

uploading it from either the GENNECT Cloud web application or a terminal that is linked to GENNECT Cloud.

*3: If you have selected measurement data for which measurement files with different content exist in GENNECT Cloud

storage and on the local PC (if the status is [Partial synchronization]), a message confirming whether you wish to update

the local PC file will be displayed. For more information about settings for changing this operation, see the following:

 [Data list (cloud)] tab

Deleting measurement data

This section describes the procedure for deleting measurement data that has been shared within an account
in the GENNECT One data list (cloud).

Status Operation

[Full synchronization] A dialog box asking you to confirm the method of deletion will be displayed. (*1)

[Partial synchronization] Delete only local files:

Deletes only measurement data stored on the local PC. This method can be used
[Not downloaded]
to save local storage, since deleted measurement data can be reacquired by
downloading it again.
Delete both local and cloud files:

312 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Completely deletes measurement data stored on the local PC as well as

measurement data stored in GENNECT Cloud.

[Not uploaded] Completely deletes measurement data stored on the local PC as well as

measurement data stored in GENNECT Cloud. (*2)

[Not uploaded (different Measurement data cannot be deleted from GENNECT One. (*3)

terminal)]

1. Select measurement data in the data list (cloud) and click the [Delete] button.

2. A dialog box asking you to confirm the method of deletion will be displayed(*1)(*2)(*3). Select the desired
method of deletion and click the [OK] button.

Methods of deletion Description

Delete only local files Deletes only measurement data stored on the local PC. This method can be used to
save local storage, since deleted measurement data can be reacquired by downloading
it again.

Delete both local and cloud Completely deletes measurement data stored on the local PC as well as measurement
files data stored in GENNECT Cloud.

3. The measurement data will be deleted.

Note
*1: In the default state, a dialog box asking you to confirm the method of deletion will be displayed. For more information

about settings for changing this operation, see the following:

 [Data list (cloud)] tab

*2: If the status of the selected measurement data is [Not uploaded], a dialog box asking you to confirm whether you wish
to delete the data will be displayed. Deleting measurement data whose status is [Not uploaded] will cause links between

313 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

GENNECT Cloud and the measurement data to be lost. If you anticipate needing to download the measurement data

again, upload it to GENNECT Cloud and delete only the local file.

*3: Measurement data whose status is [Not uploaded (different terminal)] cannot be deleted from GENNECT One. Such

files must be deleted from either the GENNECT Cloud web application or another terminal that is linked to GENNECT

Cloud.

314 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Configuring Application Settings Related to GENNECT Cloud

This section describes settings that apply to links between GENNECT One and GENNECT Cloud.

1. Select [Settings]-[Application].

2. Select [GENNECT Cloud settings] and click [Start] to display the settings window.

[Remote monitoring mode] tab

This tab allows you to change settings related to GENNECT One’s remote monitoring mode.

Setting Value Description

Remote monitoring mode start confirmation
Display a confirmation dialog On Display a confirmation dialog when starting remote monitoring
when starting remote mode.
monitoring mode Off Do not display a confirmation dialog when starting remote
monitoring mode.

[Data list (cloud)] tab

This tab allows you to change settings related to the data list (cloud).

315 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Setting Value Description

Upload settings
If local files have Display message to confirm Display a confirmation dialog when uploading.
changed Upload Always overwrite GENNECT Cloud measurement
data by uploading local measurement data.
Do not upload Never upload measurement data to GENNECT
Cloud.
Download settings
If cloud files have Display message to confirm Display a confirmation dialog when
changed downloading.
Download Always overwrite local measurement data with
GENNECT Cloud measurement data.
Do not download Never download measurement data from
GENNECT Cloud.
Deletion settings
If files have been Display message to confirm Display a message confirming the method of
uploaded to the cloud deletion.
Delete only local files. Always delete only local measurement data.
(Setting for saving local storage space)
Delete both local and cloud Always delete both local and cloud measurement
files data.
(Setting for deleting all data)

[Data list (local)] tab

This tab allows you to change settings related to the data list (local).

Setting Instructions Description

Upload destination setting
Measurement Select by clicking [ ... ] When uploading from the data list (local) to GENNECT
group button Cloud, specify the measurement group to which to upload the
data.
When not specified, data will be uploaded to the [Default]
measurement group.

Folder Select by clicking [ ... ] When uploading from the data list (local) to GENNECT
button Cloud, specify the data folder to which to upload the data.
When not specified, data will be uploaded to the root folder
on the GENNECT Cloud [Drive] window ([Data folder]).

316 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

[Logging data] tab

This tab allows you to change settings related to logging data saved by the logging and dashboard functions.

Setting Value Description

Upload settings Manual Do not upload data to GENNECT Cloud automatically.
Data will be saved in the data list (local). Please upload
manually as desired.
Automatic Upload saved or segmented logging data to GENNECT
Cloud automatically.
Automatic Upload files and file attributes When saving and segmenting logging data, upload files and
setting to the cloud. file attributes (information about links to GENNECT
Cloud) to GENNECT Cloud. (*1)(*2)
*1: Once your GENNECT Cloud storage is full, logging data will
no longer be uploaded automatically.
*2: This setting is valid only when the [Upload settings]-
[Automatic] setting is enabled.

317 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Using Remote Monitoring Mode

Overview
Remote monitoring mode allows you to access instruments connected to a computer from a remote location
using GENNECT Cloud.
For details about GENNECT Cloud functionality, please see the GENNECT Cloud online help
(https://www.gennect.net/en/cloud/manual/1-1).

Real-time monitor

The real-time monitor saves measured values for channels selected from instruments’ measurement
parameters to the cloud server. The measurement interval is fixed at 1 min.
This manual refers to data saved in this manner as “GENNECT acquisition data.”
·Measured values updated in real time can be reviewed in a web browser.
·You can select a channel and interval and graph associated measured value. ·Values from multiple
instrument models can be grouped together in a single graph.
·Measured values can be downloaded in the CSV format.

Remote control

Remote control functionality allows you to operate an instrument safely from a remote location by using its
built-in HTTP server function.

Transferring and downloading files

Measurement data files that are saved on an instrument can be transferred automatically to a local
computer. Files transferred to a computer can be remotely acquired via the cloud. This manual refers to
such measurement data as “instrument data files.”
When using this function, the instrument settings are changed for file transfer. See below for details.

318 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

 Instrument save settings

It takes about 7 minutes until the instrument data file transferred from the instrument is available for
acquisition.

Alarm

Alarm notifications are generated when GENNECT acquisition data satisfies alarm conditions and when
instrument data files are uploaded. Notification methods include LINE, Slack, Microsoft Teams, GENNECT
Cross, and web application displays.

Workflow
Remote monitoring mode can be started and stopped using the following procedure:

Connect an instrument to a computer with a LAN cable (p.17)

Start remote monitoring mode (p.319)

Check the connection environment and log in (p.320)

Set the measurement group (p.320)

Select instruments (p.321)

Select channels (p.323)

Exit remote monitoring mode (p.325)

Starting remote monitoring mode

Starting remote monitoring mode

1. Click the [Function] tab and then click [Remote monitoring mode].

319 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Checking the communications environment and logging in

The [Preparations for starting remote monitoring mode] window will be displayed.

1. Click the [Confirm] button next to [Check the connection environment] as necessary.
You can verify that your environment supports use of remote monitoring mode.
If it doesn’t, you won’t be able to use remote monitoring mode.
If your network has access restrictions, please consult your network administrator and consider removing
the restrictions.
Network Requirements :
Communication using outbound TCP: 443 port and TLS intercommunication must be allowed to AWS IoT
("iot.cloud.gennect.net"*).
Supported example :
-1. Disable SSL Decryption and other functions for "iot.cloud.gennect.net"* (port 443)
-2. Allow access to this service if it is restricted by filtering software

*If you use this function outside of China: "iot.cloud.gennect.net"

*If you use this function in China: "iot.cloud.gennect.cn"

2. Click the [Log in] button to log in to GENNECT Cloud.

This step can be skipped if you’re already logged in. If you don’t have a GENNECT Cloud account, please
create one first.
 Preparing to Use GENNECT Cloud
 Logging In to GENNECT Cloud

3. Click the [Next] button.

Setting the measurement group

All data in GENNECT Cloud belongs to a measurement group, which is the unit by which data is managed.
For more information about measurement groups, see the online help
(https://www.gennect.net/en/cloud/manual/12-1).

1. Select the measurement group to which you wish to upload GENNECT acquisition data and

320 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

instrument data files.

2. Configure automatic file uploads. This setting allows generated instrument data files to be uploaded to
the cloud.
ON: Upload instrument data files automatically. Please note that some instrument models and settings
will result in larger file sizes, which will use large amounts of mobile data. Automatic uploading is
limited to files that are 128 MB or less in size.
OFF: Store instrument data files on the computer and do not upload them automatically.

3. Configure automatic time synchronization.

Enabling this setting will synchronize instruments’ clocks once a day. Depending on the instrument
model and firmware version, synchronizing the time may cause measurement or integration to stop. In
this case, a new file will be created when the time is synchronized. See below for more information.
 Synchronizing Instrument Clocks: Details
4. Click the [OK] button.

Selecting instruments

1. The [Select instrument] window will be displayed.

The application will display the [Searching instruments] message while searching for instruments that are
connected to the computer via the LAN.

2. A list of the instruments found during the search made in the previous step will be displayed.

321 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

※ You can search again by clicking the [Update] button.

※ When the "Update Automatically" checkbox is turned OFF, automatic search for measuring instruments is not
performed when this screen is opened.
When the "Update Automatically" checkbox is checked ON, automatic search for measuring instruments is
performed when this screen is opened.

※ If the search results include an instrument that has never been connected to the application, it will be
shown as follows:

To connect to this instrument, select the instrument’s model in the [Instrument] drop-down menu.

※ To manually add an instrument that was not found by the search, specify the IP address directly in the
[Set IP address here] field and select the corresponding instrument in the drop-down menu.

※ You can check the connection by selecting [Check connection] in the context menu.

If the application is unable to verify a connection with the instrument, for example because the LAN
cable is disconnected, the instrument will be shown as follows:

※ You can delete the instrument from the list by selecting [Delete] in the context menu.

3. Select the checkbox for each instrument you wish to use in remote monitoring mode.
Click the [Start] button to continue.

322 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

※ A light-green connection status indicates the instrument was found but is not currently connected.
Double-click the status icon or click the [Start] button to connect to the instrument.

Connected: Green ( )
Found: Light green ( )
Not found: Red ( )

※ You can select up to three instruments with GENNECT Cloud Free, or up to eight instruments with
GENNECT Cloud Standard/Pro.

Selecting Channels

1. The [Channel Selection] window will be displayed. The “Collecting measurement channels” message will
be displayed.

2. A list of enabled measurement channels for the instruments selected on the [Select instrument] window
will be displayed.

323 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

※ You can search again for measurement channels by clicking the button.
※ In PQ3100,PQ3198,PW3360,PW3365,PW3335*,PW3336*,PW3337*,PW8001 (with harmonics analysis
only), you can select the harmonics measurement channels by selecting the drop down list of
measurement items.
*If the version of this application is less than V5.10, the acquisition of harmonic items for PW3335,
PW3336, and PW3337 is not supported. Please upgrade this application to V5.10 or later.

※ Measurement parameters for some instruments, for example the PW3336, PW8001, and PQ3198, will
be displayed by identifier (PWP, MUpk, etc.). For more information about the relationship between
identifiers and measurement parameter names, see the following:
 Identification name and measurement item name in Logging and Dashboard function
※ If the number of measurement parameters for normal items exceeds 1200, the page will be divided into
multiple pages. In such a case, select the page to be displayed in the combobox and switch pages.

3. Select the checkbox for each measurement channel you wish to log.Click the [OK] button to continue.

324 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

※ The number of channels that can be selected is as follows:

Plan Number of channels (per
instrument)
Trial 10
Free 30
Standard 30
Pro 100

※ You can narrow down the measurement channels shown in the list using the search box at the top of the
window.
※ You can limit the measurement channels shown in the list to those channels that have already been
selected by clicking the button.
※ You can select or deselect all channels by clicking the button.

Exiting remote monitoring mode

1. Click the [Finish] button to exit remote monitoring mode.
When you exit remote monitoring mode, uploading of GENNECT acquisition data and instrument data files
to the cloud will stop.

325 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Window layout

①Instrument name display

Click here to hide/unhide area ②.

②Measurement channel and measured value display

This area displays the current measured value for each channel.

③Internet connection environment icon

If an Internet connection is available, the icon shown in the screenshot will be shown.

If not, the icon will be shown.

④”Open in browser” button

Click this button to open the GENNECT Cloud web application.

⑤Exit button
Click this button to exit remote monitoring mode.

326 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Controlling an Instrument (Remote Control [Cloud])

By logging in to GENNECT Cloud(*1), you can control, via GENNECT Cloud, instruments connected to a
remotely located gateway (a device that connects using GENNECT Remote) or another computer on which
GENNECT One has been installed.

*1: For more information about how to log in to GENNECT Cloud from GENNECT One, see the following:
 Logging In to GENNECT Cloud

Supported instruments

Model Name Firmware URL

version

PQ3100 Power Quality Ver. 2.30 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=1651

Analyzer later

PQ3198 Power Quality Ver. 2.00 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=1766

Analyzer later

PW3335 Power Meter Ver. 1.11 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=660

later

PW3336 Power Meter Ver. 1.23 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=405

later

PW3337 Power Meter Ver. 1.23 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=287

later

PW3360 Clamp On Power Ver. 3.21 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=235

Logger later

PW3365 Clamp On Power Ver. 2.10 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=228

Logger later

PW3390 Power Quality Ver. 2.00 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=1678

Analyzer later

PW6001 Power Quality Ver. 3.02 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=649

Analyzer later

PW8001 Power Quality Ver. 1.00 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=1907

Analyzer later

LR8450, LR8450-01 Memory HiLogger Ver. 1.50 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=1794

later https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=1808

MR6000 Memory HiCorder Ver. 3.11 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=1716

later

MR8875 Memory HiCorder Ver. 2.17 or https://www.hioki.co.jp/jp/products/detail/?product_key=860

later

327 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Starting remote control

1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

2. Click the [Remote control] button ( ) on the [Cloud] panel.

3. The [Remote Control] screen will open, allowing you to control the instrument.

Restarting the instrument

1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

2. Click the [Restart measurement] button ( ) on the [Cloud] panel.

3. The target instrument will restart.

Open in browser
1. Select the [Console] tab on the main screen.

328 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

2. Click the button ( ) on the [Cloud] panel.

3. The GENNECT Cloud web application will open in your browser.

329 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Update the firmware of the instrument

The firmware of instruments connected to a PC over a LAN can be updated to the latest version through PC
operation. (※1, ※2)

・Automatically checks if the firmware of the connected measuring instrument is the latest version and
displays the status with an icon. (※1)
・Since the latest firmware is downloaded from the GENNECT Cloud, version upgrades can be performed
only by operating the application. (※1, ※2)

※1. Internet connection for PC is required.

※2. Login to GENNECT Cloud is required.
 Logging In to GENNECT Cloud

Supported Instruments
Model Name Firmware version URL
LR8450, MEMORY HiLOGGER Ver. 2.20 or later(*1) https://www.hioki.com/en/products/detail/?product_key=6
LR8450-01 535
PW8001 POWER ANALYZER Ver. 1.50 or later https://www.hioki.com/global/products/power-
meters/power-analyzer/id_412384
*1: This function is not supported for aircraft with the following serial numbers
LR8450: Serial number is 210317114 or earlier
LR8450-01: Serial number is 210322039 or earlier。

Limitations

Restrictions on firmware upgrade functionality

Item Limitation Remarks

Communications interface LAN USB communication is not supported.
Number of instruments 1 unit
that can be upgraded
simultaneously

Specifications for each measuring instrument

Model Requirement of recording media What to do if the instrument is turned off during the upgrade
for measuring instruments
LR8450, LR8450-01 Unnecessary The measuring instrument needs to be repaired.

PW8001 USB memory must be inserted The measuring instrument needs to be repaired.

Workflow

Connect an instrument to a computer with a LAN cable (p.17)

Perform version upgrades of the instrument (p.331)

330 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Operating Procedure

1. Select the "Console" tab on the main application screen. Select the [LAN] navigation bar.

2. Execute "Update". If the instrument supports the firmware upgrade function, an icon will appear next
to the version number.

icon Description
Firmware is already at the latest version.

The latest firmware is available.

Click this icon to open the firmware upgrade confirmation window.
Failed to obtain the latest version due to a communication error.
Please check the connection between the PC and the instrument or the Internet connection of the PC.

3. Click the [UPDATE] status icon to display the [Confirm Firmware Version Upgrade] screen.
4. Read the notes in the screen carefully and click "Execute" if you wish to execute the firmware upgrade.
※Never turn off the power to the unit while upgrading. Also, do not remove any media. If the power is
turned off, the unit will not operate properly and will require repair.

5. When the upgrade is successfully completed, the message "The upgrade was successfully completed." is
displayed when the upgrade is successfully completed.
If the upgrade fails, the reason for the failure will be displayed as a message, so please follow the on-
screen guidance.

331 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

If the upgrade failed

After executing the version-up of the measuring instrument, the following message will appear if you
cannot confirm that the version-up has been successfully completed. In this case, please take the actions
described in the table for each measuring instrument.

In this case, please check the connection a few minutes after the message is displayed.
 [Check Connection] of Instruments
After checking the connection,
・If the version number is updated to the latest one, the upgrade has been successfully completed.
・If your version number is not up-to-date, please try upgrading again.
・If the instrument does not appear on the console screen or there is an error in communication with the
instrument, please check the following for each instrument

Model Contents of response

LR8450 Make sure the instrument is turned on.
LR8450-01 ・If the power is on, reboot the system and check the connection again.
PW8001, ・If the instrument is not powered on, check to see if it can be turned on. If the power does not turn
on, the instrument needs to be repaired. Please contact your nearest sales office.

[Check Connection] of Instruments

The console screen shows the firmware version of the LAN-connected instrument.
If the version number of the instrument displayed on the console screen differs from the version number
displayed on the main unit (e.g., if the firmware of the instrument has been manually upgraded), it is
necessary to [Check Connection] in order to update the information displayed on the console screen.

You can [check connection] of the measuring instrument by one of the following methods.。
1. Select the instrument and choose "check connection" from the menu that appears by right-clicking.
2. Double-click the connection status icon.

332 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Reviewing and Editing User Information and Account Information

This section describes how to review and edit information for the user logged in to GENNECT Cloud in the
application as well as information for the account to which the user belongs.

1. Log in using the account and user whose information you wish to review or edit. (Reference: Logging In to
GENNECT Cloud)
2. Click the icon at the top right of the application’s main window and click the displayed [Display user
information...] menu item.
The [User Information] window will open.

*Only the information in the table below can be reviewed and edited in the application. More detailed
information can be reviewed and edited on the GENNECT Cloud web page.

Item Description
1 User icon Displays a user-configured icon.
2 Change icon Displays a menu related to the icon.
·[Select icon...]: Specifies an image file to use as the user icon. Image files in the JPG,
PNG, GIF, and BMP format with a file size of less than 1 MB are supported.
·[Initialize icon]: Changes the user icon to the default icon.
3 Username Sets a string to use as the user’s display name. (1 to 50 characters)
4 Email address Displays the registered email address.
5 GENNECT Cloud Displays the plan name and expiration date for the GENNECT Cloud subscription. If
license the expiration date is less than 31 days away, an exclamation point (“!”) will be shown
to indicate that the expiration date is approaching.
6 Display detailed user Accesses the GENNECT Cloud web page to allow review and editing of more detailed
information user and account information. *The page will open in your browser.
7 Upgrade to Free plan Upgrade the logged-in account from the Trial plan to the Free plan. Accesses the
*Trial plan only GENNECT Cloud web page to complete the necessary procedure. Please see
Upgrading the Trial plan to the Free plan for details.
8 Delete Trial user Deletes the logged-in Trial user. Please see Deleting the trial user for details.
*Trial plan only
9 Save changes Saves changes made in this window. *This button is available when the icon or
username has been edited.
10 Cancel Closes the window without saving changes.

Deleting the trial user

This section describes how to delete the trial user using the application.
Deleting the trial user will cause all data saved in the cloud to be deleted, and you will no longer be able to
access data in the [GENNECT Cloud] folder in the data list. Be sure to back up any data as necessary before
deleting the trial user.

333 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

1. Log in as the trial user you wish to delete. (Reference: Logging In to GENNECT Cloud)
2. Click the icon at the top right of the application’s main window and click the displayed [Display user
information...] menu item.
The [User Information] window will be displayed. Click [Delete trial user].

Upgrading the Trial plan to the Free plan

The Trial plan has an expiration date. If you wish to continue to use the service after the Trial plan expires,
please switch to the Free plan before the expiration date. If you do not switch to the Free plan before the
expiration date, all data saved in the cloud will be deleted, and you will no longer be able to access data in
the [GENNECT Cloud] folder in the data list. Once the expiration date has passed, you will no longer be
able to transition to the Free plan.

1. Log in as the trial user you wish to switch to the Free plan. (Reference: Logging In to GENNECT Cloud)
2. Click the icon at the top right of the application’s main window and click the displayed [Display user
information...] menu item.
3. The [User Information] window will be displayed. Click [Switch to Free plan].
4. When your browser opens, follow the instructions on the page to switch to the Free plan.

334 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Share and manage battery tester threshold and profile information in the
cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

This feature requires a subscription to a GENNECT Cloud Standard or Pro plan.

Battery tester threshold tables can be shared with other users in the same account.
See below for the number of threshold tables and profile information tables that can be shared for each
GENNECT Cloud plan.

GENNECT Cloud plan File name Max. number

Standard Battery threshold table 30
Battery profile table 30
Pro Battery threshold table 100
Battery profile table 100

Share battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

1. Log in to GENNECT Cloud from GENNECT One.

For details, please refer to the following.
 Logging In to GENNECT Cloud

2. Open the [Setting on Battery Tester] screen by clicking the "Settings" button in [Console]-[USB].

3. If logged in to GENNECT Cloud, you will see the [Local] and [Cloud] function buttons on the
[Manage Thresholds] screen.
In addition, the [Upload] button is displayed on the [Local] screen.

335 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. On the [Local] screen, select the local threshold table you wish to share and click the [Upload] button.
At this time, the [Select measurement group] screen will appear, so select the measurement group to
upload to.
Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud online manual for more information about measurement groups.
GENNECT Cloud Manual

5. The selected threshold tables will be uploaded to the [Cloud] screen.

336 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Manage battery tester thresholds in the cloud (GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro plans)

You can manage threshold tables that are shared with another user in the same account.
Threshold tables are managed on the [Cloud] screen of the [Manage Thresholds] screen.
See below for the file status icons that appear on the [Cloud] screen.

Status icon Description

[Full synchronization]
Files exist both in the cloud and in local storage, and measurement data content is identical.

[Partial synchronization]
Files exist both in the cloud and in local storage, and measurement data content differs. The status
can be changed to [Full synchronization] by either downloading changes in the cloud to the [Data
list (cloud)] or uploading changes in the [Data list (cloud)] to the cloud.
[Not downloaded]
Files only exist in cloud storage.
Files stored in the cloud can be downloaded from GENNECT One.

For more information on the functionality of the [Cloud] screen, please see below.

337 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

No. Function name Description

① Update Update the [cloud] management screen with the latest information.

② Measurement group Switches the measurement group, so that the information related
to the measurement group will be displayed in [Cloud] screen.
Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud online manual for more
information about measurement groups.
GENNECT Cloud Manual

No. Function name Description

② Export Export the selected threshold table to a file (hok format).
If the status is [Not Downloaded], the file is downloaded from GENNECT
Cloud and exported.

③ Import Import the selected threshold table from a file (hok format).
Imported thresholds are uploaded to the GENNECT Cloud.

⑤ Upload Upload the threshold table with status [Partial Synchronization] to

GENNECT Cloud and overwite it.
Upload to the measurement group currently displayed in [Measurement
group].

⑦ Download Download threshold tables with status [Not Downloaded] or [Partial

Synchronization] from GENNECT Cloud.

⑦ New Create a new threshold table.

The created threshold table will be uploaded to GENNECT Cloud.

⑧ Duplicate Duplicate the selected threshold tables.

The replicated threshold tables will be uploaded to GENNECT Cloud.

338 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

⑨ Delete Delete the selected threshold table.

There are two methods of deletion
Method Description
Delete only Deletes only measurement data stored on the local
local files PC. This method can be used to save local storage,
since deleted measurement data can be reacquired
by downloading it again.
Delete both Completely deletes measurement data stored on the
local and cloud local PC as well as measurement data stored in
files GENNECT Cloud.

⑩ Open Open the selected threshold table.

[Edit Threshold Table] window opens.
In the [Edit Threshold Table] window, you can edit the threshold table.
You can also transfer the threshold table to the battery tester with the
[Transfer] button.
⑪ Close Close the [Settings on Battery Tester] window.

339 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Share battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard / Pro
plans)

1. Log in to GENNECT Cloud from GENNECT One.

For details, please refer to the following.
 Logging In to GENNECT Cloud

2. Open the [Setting on Battery Tester] screen by clicking the "Settings" button in [Console]-[USB].

3. If logged in to GENNECT Cloud, you will see the [Local] and [Cloud] function buttons on the
[Manage Profiles] screen.
In addition, the [Upload] button is displayed on the [Local] screen.

340 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. On the [Local] screen, select the local profile table you wish to share and click the [Upload] button.
At this time, the [Select measurement group] screen will appear, so select the measurement group to
upload to.
Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud online manual for more information about measurement groups.
GENNECT Cloud Manual

5. The selected profile tables will be uploaded to the [Cloud] screen.

Manage battery tester profiles in the cloud (BT3554 only, GENNECT Cloud Standard /
Pro plans)

You can manage profile tables that are shared with another user in the same account.
Profile tables are managed on the [Cloud] screen of the [Manage Profiles] screen.
See below for the file status icons that appear on the [Cloud] screen.

Status icon Description

[Full synchronization]
Files exist both in the cloud and in local storage, and measurement data content is identical.

341 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

[Partial synchronization]
Files exist both in the cloud and in local storage, and measurement data content differs. The status
can be changed to [Full synchronization] by either downloading changes in the cloud to the [Data
list (cloud)] or uploading changes in the [Data list (cloud)] to the cloud.
[Not downloaded]
Files only exist in cloud storage.
Files stored in the cloud can be downloaded from GENNECT One.

For more information on the functionality of the [Cloud] screen, please see below.

No. Function name Description

① Update Update the [cloud] management screen with the latest information.

② Measurement group Switches the measurement group, so that the information related
to the measurement group will be displayed in [Cloud] screen.
Please refer to the GENNECT Cloud online manual for more
information about measurement groups.
GENNECT Cloud Manual

No. Function name Description

③ Export Export the selected profile table to a file (hok format).
If the status is [Not Downloaded], the file is downloaded from GENNECT
Cloud and exported.

④ Import Import the selected profile table from a file (hok format).
Imported profiles are uploaded to the GENNECT Cloud.

⑤ Upload Upload the profile table with status [Partial Synchronization] to

GENNECT Cloud and overwite it.
Upload to the measurement group currently displayed in [Measurement
group].

⑥ Download Download profile tables with status [Not Downloaded] or [Partial

Synchronization] from GENNECT Cloud.

342 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

⑦ New Create a new profile table.

The created profile table will be uploaded to GENNECT Cloud.

⑧ Duplicate Duplicate the selected profile tables.

The replicated profile tables will be uploaded to GENNECT Cloud.

⑨ Delete Delete the selected profile table.

There are two methods of deletion
Method Description
Delete only Deletes only measurement data stored on the local
local files PC. This method can be used to save local storage,
since deleted measurement data can be reacquired
by downloading it again.
Delete both Completely deletes measurement data stored on the
local and cloud local PC as well as measurement data stored in
files GENNECT Cloud.

⑩ Open Open the selected profile table.

[Edit Profile Table] window opens.
In the [Edit Profile Table] window, you can edit the profile table. You can
also transfer the profile table to the battery tester with the [Transfer]
button.(*1)
⑪ Close Close the [Settings on Battery Tester] window.

(*1) The profile table can be transferred only to Battery Tester BT3554-50.

343 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Logging Out
1. Click the icon at the top right of the application’s main window.
2. When the menu is displayed, click [Log out].

3. Once you are successfully logged out, the message [You’ve been logged out.] will be displayed.

344 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Show Version
1. Select [Information]-[Version] in the menu.

2. The version information of GENNECT One is displayed.

345 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Check for Updates

* An Internet connection is required for this function.

1. Select [Information]-[Check for Updates] in the menu.

2. If you are using the latest version of GENNECT One, the following message appears.

3. If a latest version of GENNECT One is available, the following message appears.

Click [OK] button to download the latest version.

346 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Show Help
1. Select [Information]-[Help] in the menu.

2. The user’s manual will be displayed in the browser.

347 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Show Inquiry form

* An Internet connection is required for this function.

1. Select [Information]-[Suggestions] in the menu.

2. The inquiry form will be displayed in the browser.

3. Type name, email address and message and click [OK] to submit.
* Check [Request a response from HIOKI] if you need a feedback from HIOKI. A feedback message will be
sent from our support team to the email address you entered.

348 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Show Privacy Policy

* An Internet connection is required for this function.

1. Select [Information]-[Privacy Policy] in the menu.

2. GENNECT One privacy policy will be displayed in the browser.

Change the language settings

1. Select [Language] in the menu. Select the language from the drop-down list.

2. The confirmation message is displayed. Click [OK] button to apply the language setting.

*If [AUTO] is selected, the program chooses the appropriate language based on the OS settings.

*The language setting is applied when you start the application next time.

349 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Uninstall the application

Here explains how to uninstall the application. There are two ways to do this.

・Uninstall from [All Programs]

・Uninstall from [Control Panel]

Uninstall from [All Programs]

1. Click [Start] button.

2. Click [All Programs].

3. Click [HIOKI]-[HIOKI GENNECT One].

4. Click [Uninstall GENNECT One].

5. The Confirmation message is displayed. Click [Yes] to uninstall.

350 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

6. ア The application has been uninstalled.

Uninstall from [Control Panel]

1. Click [Start] button.

2. Click [Control Panel].

3. Click [Program]-[Uninstall Program].

351 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

4. Double-click on [HIOKI GENNECT One] in the program list.

5. The Confirmation message is displayed. Click [Yes] to uninstall.

6. The application has been uninstalled.

352 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

Appendix
Check or configure the network settings of the computer
This section describes how to check or configure network settings in Windows 7.

1. Click [Start] button.

2. Click [Control Panel].

3. Click [Network and Internet].

4. Click [Network and Sharing Center].

5. Click [Change adapter settings].

6. Right-click on the network you want to confirm and select [Properties] in the right-click menu.

353 / 356
 GENNECT One User’s Manual

7. Select [Internet Protocol Version 4(TCP/IPv4)] and click [Properties].

8. Confirm the network settings. Click [OK] to apply the settings.

354 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Identification name and measurement item name in Logging and Dashboard function

PW3335, PW3336, PW3337

Identification name Measurement item name

U/I Voltage/Current RMS
P Active power
UMN/IMN/PMN/SMN/QMN/PFMN Voltage/Current/Active power/Apparent power/Reactive power/Power factor MEAN
UDC/IDC/PDC Voltage/Current/Active power DC
UAC/IAC/PAC/SAC/QAC/PFAC Voltage/Current/Active power/Apparent power/Reactive power/Power factor AC
UFND/IFND/PFND/SFND/QFND/PFFND Voltage/Current/Active power/Apparent power/Reactive power/Power factor
fundamental wave value
DEGAC Power phase angle AC
DEGFND Power phase angle fundamental wave value
FREQU/FREQI Voltage/Current frequency
UPK/IPK Voltage/Current waveform peak
EFF1 Efficiency1
EFF2 Efficiency2
UCF/ICF Voltage/Current crest factor
ITAV/PTAV Time average current/active power
ITAVMN/ PTAVMN Time average current/active power MEAN
ITAVDC/ PTAVDC Time average current/active power DC
URF/IRF Voltage/Current ripple rate
UTHD/ITHD Voltage/Current total harmonic distortion
PWP/ MWP Integ. active power in positive/negative direction
WP Integ. active power in positive and negative direction
PWPMN/ MWPMN Integ. active power in positive/negative direction MEAN
WPMN Integ. active power in positive and negative direction MEAN
PWPDC/ MWPDC Integ. active power in positive/negative direction DC
WPDC Integ. active power in positive and negative direction DC
IH Integ. current in positive and negative direction
IHMN Integ. current in positive and negative direction MEAN
PIHDC/ MIHDC Integ. current in positive/negative direction DC
IHDC Integ. current in positive and negative direction DC
HUL/HIL Harmonic voltage/current level
HPL Harmonic active power level
HUD/HID Harmonic voltage/current content percentage
HPD Harmonic active power content percentage
HUP/HIP Harmonic voltage/current phase angle
HPP Harmonic voltage and current phase difference

PW8001

Identification name Measurement item name

Urms/Irms Voltage/Current RMS
Umn/Imn Voltage/Current MEAN
Udc/Idc Voltage/Current DC
Uac/Iac Voltage/Current AC
Ufnd/Ifnd/Pfnd/Sfnd/Qfnd/PFfnd Voltage/Current/Active power/Apparent power/Reactive power/Power factor fundamental
wave value
PUpk/PIpk Voltage/Current waveform peak (positive)
MUpk/MIpk Voltage/Current waveform peak (negative)
Uthd/Ithd Voltage/Current total harmonic distortion
Urf/Irf Voltage/Current ripple rate
P Active power
S Apparent power
Q Reactive power
PF Power factor
Udeg/Ideg/DEG Voltage/Current/Power phase angle
FU/FI Voltage/Current frequency
PIH/MIH Integ. current in positive/negative direction
IH Integ. current in positive and negative direction
PWP/MWP Integ. active power in positive/negative direction
WP Integ. active power in positive and negative direction
ETIME Total elapsed time for integration
Eff Efficiency

355 / 356
GENNECT One User’s Manual

Loss Loss
Tq Torque
Spd Rotation speed
Pm Motor power
Slip Slip
MTCH Free input during independent input mode operation
UDF User-defined function
Pst Short-term flicker value
PstMax Maximum short-term flicker value
Plt Long-term flicker value
PinstMax Maximum instantaneous flicker value
PinstMin Minimum instantaneous flicker value
DC Relative steady-state voltage change
DMax Maximum relative voltage change
TMax Period while the relative voltage change exceeds the threshold
HF Harmonic synchronous frequency
HUL/HIL Harmonic voltage/current level
HPL Harmonic active power level
HUD/HID Harmonic voltage/current content percentage
HPD Harmonic active power content percentage
HUP/HIP Harmonic voltage/current phase angle
HPP Harmonic voltage and current phase difference
IHUL/IHIL Interharmonic voltage/current level
IHUD/ IHID Interharmonic voltage/current content percentage

*Measurement items in blue cells can be obtained only for devices equipped with the motor analysis option.
*Measurement items in yellow cells can be obtained only when IEC harmonic mode is set.
*The identification name of the measurement item of the secondary unit when using optical link mode is the
one with "SC" added to the end of the identification name in the table above.
Example: UrmsSC1: RMS voltage of CH1 of the secondary unit, PSC2: Effective power of CH2 of the
secondary unit

PQ3198

Identification name Measurement item name

Freq Frequency
Urms/Irms Voltage/Current RMS
Upk+/Ipk+ Voltage/Current waveform peak (positive)
Upk-/Ipk- Voltage/Current waveform peak (negative)
Uthd-F/Ithd-F Voltage/Current total harmonic distortion（Fundamental wave value）
Uthd-R/Ithd-R Voltage/Current total harmonic distortion（RMS）
UharmH/IharmH High-order harmonic voltage/current component
P Active power
S Apparent power
Q Reactive power
PF Power factor
KF K factor
Eff Efficiency
Uunb/Iunb Voltage/Current negative-phase unbalance factor
Uunb0/Iunb0 Voltage/Current zero-phase unbalance factor
WP+/ WP- Active energy (Consumption/Regeneration)
WQ_LAG/ WQ_LEAD Reactive energy (Lag/Lead)
Msv Mains signaling voltage (Level)
Msv％ Mains signaling voltage (Content rates)
Dv10/Dv10max ΔV10 flicker（every 1 minute/1-hour maximum value）
Pst/Plt IEC flicker（short/long interval voltage flicker）
Uharm/Iharm/Pharm Harmonic voltage/current level
Pharm Harmonic active power level
Uharm％/Iharm％ Harmonic voltage/current content percentage
Pharm％ Harmonic active power content percentage
Uphase/Iphase Harmonic voltage/current phase angle
Pphase Harmonic voltage and current phase difference

356 / 356